My Forking Life

  • Air Fryer
  • Jamaican
  • Entree
  • Browse Recipes
  • Breakfast
  • Side Dishes
  • About
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Air Fryer
  • Jamaican
  • Entree
  • Browse Recipes
  • Breakfast
  • Side Dishes
  • About
search icon
Homepage link
  • Air Fryer
  • Jamaican
  • Entree
  • Browse Recipes
  • Breakfast
  • Side Dishes
  • About
×
Home » Recipe Index

Easy Peach Cobbler Recipe

June 5, 2026 by Tanya Harris Leave a Comment

peach cobbler in a bowl with vanilla ice cream on the side

This peach cobbler has a crispy biscuit topping over a thick, syrupy peach filling. It's made with canned peaches and pantry staples, and comes together with minimal effort.

peach cobbler in a bowl with vanilla ice cream on the side

You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

tanya holding bowl and mixing

I've made a lot of cobblers over the years, and I can say with full confidence that this is the best peach cobbler I've ever had. The biscuit topping comes out crispy on top, soft underneath where it meets the peaches, and the filling's juices thicken and turn syrupy as it bakes. It's exactly what a cobbler should be.

I use canned peaches because they work year-round, and the quality is consistent. You can use fresh or frozen peaches as well.

If you love this kind of Southern dessert, check out my Slow Cooker Peach Cobbler for a hands-off version.

Happy Baking,

Tanya

Peach Cobbler at a Glance

  • Prep Time: 15 minutes
  • Bake Time: 40–50 minutes
  • Total Time: About 1 hour and 10 minutes (including cooling)
  • Serves: 6
  • Best For: Weeknight desserts, potlucks, year-round baking

A Quick Look at the Ingredients

Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

For the Peach Filling

  • Canned peaches (2 cans, 15 oz each) — one can drained, one undrained. That second can of juice is what gives the filling its syrupy texture.
  • Unsalted butter — melted in the baking dish first to coat the bottom.
  • Light brown sugar — adds a deeper sweetness than granulated and works well with the peach juice.
  • Vanilla extract — just enough to round out the flavor.
  • Ground cinnamon and nutmeg — warm spice that goes well with peaches.
  • Salt — just a pinch to balance the sweetness.

For the Biscuit Topping

  • All-purpose flour — the base of the topping.
  • Granulated sugar — sweetens the biscuit and helps it get golden on top.
  • Baking powder — gives the topping lift.
  • Salt — a little to balance the sugar.
  • Cold unsalted butter (cut into cubes) — this is key. Very cold butter is what creates that flaky, crumbly texture. If your butter gets warm, pop it back in the freezer for a few minutes before using.
  • Milk — brings the batter together.
Ingredients for Peach Cobbler on tray

How to Make Peach Cobbler

This is a straightforward bake. Mix the filling, make the topping, layer, and bake. Here's how it goes. Full directions can also be found in the recipe card below.

Prep the Baking Dish

Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C). Lightly grease a 2-quart baking dish (an 8×8-inch works great).

Add the 3 tablespoons of butter directly to the dish and place it in the oven for a few minutes until melted. Remove and tilt the pan so the bottom is fully coated.

melted butter in baking dish

 Season the Peaches

In a large bowl, combine the peaches (1 can drained, 1 can with its juice), brown sugar, vanilla, cinnamon, nutmeg, and salt. Stir until the peaches are well coated.

Pour the peach mixture into the buttered baking dish and spread it into an even layer.

peaches  in bowl being mixed with spices and sugar
peaches in baking dish in single layer

Make the Biscuit Topping

In a separate bowl, whisk together the flour, granulated sugar, baking powder, and salt. Add the cold cubed butter and work it into the dry ingredients with a pastry cutter or your fingertips until the mixture resembles coarse crumbs.

Pour in the milk and stir just until a thick batter forms. Do not overmix; a few lumps are fine.

Milk being poured into flour
Mixing biscuit dough in glass bowl

Top and Bake

Drop the biscuit mixture in large spoonfuls over the peaches. Spread gently, leaving some gaps so the filling can bubble through. The batter will not cover the entire baking dish. Focus on covering the middle, and leave the edges exposed.

Bake for 40–50 minutes, until the topping is golden brown and set in the center and the filling is bubbling around the edges.

Putting wet biscuit dough on top of peaches in baking dish
Finished peach cobbler in baking dish

Cool and Serve

Let the cobbler cool for at least 15–20 minutes before serving. This gives the juices time to thicken up. Serve warm, ideally with a scoop of vanilla ice cream.

Peach cobbler in baking dish with peaches

Variations

  • Fresh peaches: If you want to use fresh peaches when they're in season, use about 4–5 medium peaches, peeled and sliced. Toss them with a little sugar and let them sit for 10 minutes to release their juices before using.
  • Frozen peaches: Thaw completely and drain some of the liquid before using.
  • Peach and blueberry: Add a handful of fresh or frozen blueberries to the peach filling for a fun variation.
  • Spice it up: Add a pinch of ground ginger or cardamom alongside the cinnamon for a more complex spice profile.

Serving Suggestions

  • Serve warm with a big scoop of vanilla ice cream.
  • A dollop of whipped cream also works well if you want something lighter. Try pairing it with my Rum Raisin Ice Cream for a fun twist.
  • This cobbler is good enough to eat on its own, but if you're serving a crowd, it pairs well alongside other Southern desserts.
Spoon picking up peach cobbler

Make Ahead and Storage

Storage: Let the cobbler cool completely, then cover the dish or transfer to an airtight container. It keeps in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. The topping will soften a bit over time, but the flavor is still great.

Freezing: You can freeze peach cobbler for up to 3 months. Cover tightly with plastic wrap and foil. Keep in mind that both refrigerating and freezing will soften the biscuit topping over time as it absorbs moisture from the filling. To get the best texture back, reheat in a 325°F (160°C) oven rather than the microwave. It won't fully crisp up again, but it helps. If the crispy topping matters to you, another option is to freeze just the peach filling and make a fresh biscuit topping when you're ready to bake.

Reheating: Reheat individual portions in the microwave for 60–90 seconds, or warm the whole dish in a 325°F (160°C) oven for about 15 minutes. To help crisp the topping back up, use the oven instead of the microwave.

Spoon picking up peach cobbler

Tanya's Top Tips

  • Keep your butter for the biscuits very cold. Cold butter is what gives the biscuit topping its texture. If your kitchen is warm and the butter starts to soften while you're working, pop the cubed butter in the freezer for 5–10 minutes before adding it to the flour.
  • A 2-quart baking dish (8×8-inch) is ideal. You can use a 9×9-inch dish, but the filling will be a little shallower. I wouldn't go smaller than that, or you risk overflow.
  • You can test the cobbler for doneness by sticking a toothpick into the biscuit topping. It should come out clean.

Related Recipes

I hope you love this peach cobbler as much as we do. If you're looking for more dessert recipes, try these:

  • Slow Cooker Peach Cobbler — a hands-off version that's great for days when you want dessert without babysitting the oven.
  • Easy Southern Peach Cobbler Cake — a cake spin on the classic cobbler, perfect for feeding a crowd.
  • Homestyle Apple Crisp Recipe — if you love this cobbler, the apple crisp is another easy fruit dessert worth making.
peach cobbler in a bowl with vanilla ice cream on the side
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Peach Cobbler Recipe

This peach cobbler has a buttery biscuit topping that bakes up crispy on top and tender underneath, with a thick, syrupy peach filling that bubbles up from below.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time40 minutes mins
Resting Time15 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Keyword: peach cobbler, peach cobbler recipe
Servings: 6
Calories: 386kcal
Author: Tanya Harris

Ingredients

Peach Filling

  • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 2 (15 ounce) cans of peaches in fruit juice 1 can drained, 1 can undrained
  • ⅓ cup packed light brown sugar
  • 1½ teaspoons vanilla extract
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • ⅛ teaspoon salt

Biscuit Topping

  • 1 cup all-purpose flour
  • 1 cup granulated sugar
  • 2 teaspoons baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ¼ cup cold unsalted butter cut into cubes
  • ½ cup milk

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350°F (175°C). Lightly grease a 2-quart baking dish (8×8-inch). Add butter to the dish and place in the oven for a few minutes until melted. Tilt to coat the bottom evenly.
  • Meanwhile, in a large bowl, combine peaches (1 drained, 1 with juice), light brown sugar, vanilla extract, cinnamon, nutmeg, and salt. Stir until the peaches are well coated.
  • Carefully remove the baking dish from the oven. Pour peach mixture into the buttered baking dish and spread evenly.
  • In a separate bowl, whisk together all-purpose flour, granulated sugar, baking powder, and salt. Add cold cubed butter and work in with a pastry cutter or fingertips until the mixture resembles coarse crumbs.
  • Pour in milk and stir just until a thick batter forms.
  • Drop biscuit mixture in large spoonfuls over the peaches. Gently spread over the peaches. The batter will not cover the entire baking dish. Focus on covering the middle, and leave the edges exposed.
  • Bake for about 40-50 minutes, until topping is golden brown and set and filling is bubbling around the edges.
  • Let cool for 15–20 minutes before serving. Serve warm, ideally with vanilla ice cream.

Notes

  • Very cold butter makes a big difference in the topping texture. If your butter starts to soften, freeze it for a few minutes before using.
  • Do not drain both cans of peaches. The juice from one undrained can creates the syrupy filling.
  • Allow resting time before serving. The juices thicken as the cobbler cools.
  • Storage: refrigerate for up to 4 days; freeze for up to 3 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 386kcal | Carbohydrates: 63g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 38mg | Sodium: 257mg | Potassium: 211mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 446IU | Vitamin C: 0.02mg | Calcium: 102mg | Iron: 1mg

Juicy Turkey Burgers Recipe 

June 2, 2026 by Tanya Harris 10 Comments

This turkey burger recipe delivers everything you want in a burger: juicy patties, a golden crust, and bold seasoning in every bite.

turkey burgers on plate
Tanya holding two turkey burgers

I love a good burger. But sometimes I want to switch things up, and a turkey burger is my go-to.

The secret to these juicy turkey burgers is two things: the right fat ratio and grated onion. I use 85/15 ground turkey, which has enough fat to keep the patties moist. And I grate my onion so it melts right into the meat.

I love serving these with my Spicy Mayonnaise or Big Mac Sauce for a little extra something.

Happy Cooking,

Tanya

TURKEY BURGERS AT A GLANCE

  • Prep Time: 25 minutes
  • Cook Time: 10 minutes
  • Total Time: About 35-40 minutes
  • Serves: 4
  • Best For: Weeknight dinners, meal prep, backyard cookouts


A Quick Look at The Ingredients

Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

  • Ground Turkey - I use an 85/15 fat ratio when it comes to turkey burgers. You could go for leaner turkey if you prefer.
  • Finely Grated Onion - Grating the onion instead of chopping it means it blends into the meat and keeps the patty moist without any big chunks. You'll need about ¼ cup, which is roughly half a medium onion.
  • Plain Breadcrumbs - Acts as a binder to help the patties hold together.
  • Olive Oil - Added directly to the meat mixture for moisture and to help brown.
  • Ketchup - Adds a touch of sweetness and keeps the patties moist.
  • Seasonings - Worcestershire Sauce, garlic powder, onion powder, smoked paprika, kosher salt, and black pepper.
  • For Serving (optional): Burger buns, lettuce, tomato, red onion, ketchup, Spicy Mayonnaise, Big Mac Sauce
ingredients for turkey burgers

Add the ingredients to a bowl


Add the ground turkey, grated onion, breadcrumbs, olive oil, ketchup, Worcestershire sauce, garlic powder, onion powder, smoked paprika, salt, and pepper to a large bowl.

ground turkey with seasoning in bowl

Mix


Gently mix until just combined. Do not overmix - overworking the meat will make the patties tough.

mixed turkey meat in bowl with seasonings and breadcrumbs

Make the patties


Divide the mixture into 4 equal portions and shape into patties about ½ inch thick. Press a slight dimple into the center of each patty. This prevents the burger from puffing up while it cooks. Place the patties on a plate or baking sheet lined with parchment and refrigerate for 15-20 minutes. This step makes them easier to handle.

turkey burgers formed into patties

Cook the patties


Heat a large nonstick skillet over medium heat. Add a little oil to the pan if you prefer. Cook the patties 4-5 minutes per side, until browned, and the internal temperature reaches 165°F (74°C). Let rest 3-5 minutes before serving.

raw turkey burger patties in skillet
flipped and cooked turkey burgers in basket

Serve and Enjoy

Place your burger on burger buns (or lettuce wraps) and top with your favorite toppings. Serve and enjoy.

turkey burgers on plate

Tanya's Top Tips for the Best Turkey Burgers

  • Use 85/15 ground turkey. I know it's tempting to go extra lean, but the fat content is what keeps the patty from drying out. This isn't the place to skimp.
  • Don't skip the chill time. Refrigerating the patties before cooking helps them hold their shape, especially on the grill.
  • Use a meat thermometer. Turkey needs to reach an internal temperature of 165°F. There's no guessing with poultry.
  • You could also use the grill. Grill these burgers over medium heat for about 4-5 minutes per side, until the internal temperature reaches 165°F (74°C). Make sure your grill grates are clean and oiled before you put the patties on. Turkey sticks more than beef, and a stuck patty will fall apart when you flip it.

Serving Suggestions

On the side, Air Fryer French Fries or coleslaw are both great options. You can also swap the bun for a lettuce wrap to keep it lighter.

Make Ahead and Storage

  • Refrigerator: Cooked turkey burgers will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freezer: You can freeze uncooked patties for up to 3 months. Place them on a parchment-lined baking sheet to freeze until solid, then transfer to a freezer bag. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before cooking for best results.
  • Reheating: Reheat in a skillet over medium-low heat, adding a splash of water and a lid to steam. This helps keep them from drying out.
turkey burgers on plate
Print Recipe
5 from 3 votes

Turkey Burgers Recipe

These turkey burgers are juicy, well-seasoned, and easy to make in a skillet. Grated onion is the secret ingredient that keeps every patty moist.
Prep Time25 minutes mins
Cook Time10 minutes mins
Total Time35 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: American
Keyword: turkey burgers, turkey burgers recipe
Servings: 4
Calories: 339kcal
Author: Tanya Harris

Ingredients

  • 1 lb ground turkey 85/15
  • ¼ cup finely grated yellow onion about ½ medium onion
  • 2 tablespoons plain breadcrumbs
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon ketchup
  • 2 teaspoons Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • ½ teaspoon smoked paprika
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For Serving

  • 4 burger buns
  • Burger toppings tomato, red onion (optional), mayonnaise, pickles, etc.

Instructions

  • Add the ground turkey, grated onion, breadcrumbs, olive oil, ketchup, Worcestershire sauce, salt, garlic powder, onion powder, smoked paprika, and black pepper to a large bowl.
  • Gently mix until just combined. Do not overmix.
  • Divide into 4 equal portions and shape into patties about ½ inch thick, pressing a slight dimple in the center. Place on a plate or parchment-lined baking sheet and refrigerate for 15-20 minutes.
  • Heat a large nonstick skillet over medium heat. Add a little oil if needed. Cook patties 4-5 minutes per side, until browned and the internal temperature reaches 165°F (74°C). Rest 3-5 minutes before serving.
  • Serve on burger buns with your favorite toppings.

Notes

  • Use 85/15 ground turkey for the juiciest results. 
  • Store cooked burgers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. Freeze uncooked patties for up to 3 months.
  • You could also use the grill. Grill these burgers over medium heat for about 4-5 minutes per side, until the internal temperature reaches 165°F (74°C).  Make sure your grill grates are clean and oiled before you put the patties on. Turkey sticks more than beef, and a stuck patty will fall apart when you flip it.

Nutrition

Calories: 339kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 32g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 62mg | Sodium: 962mg | Potassium: 452mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 175IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 82mg | Iron: 3mg

Jamaican Saltfish Fritters (Stamp and Go)

May 24, 2026 by Tanya Harris 3 Comments

saltfish fritters on plate

Crispy on the outside, soft and savory in the middle. These Jamaican saltfish fritters, also called stamp and go, come straight from my mom's kitchen.

saltfish fritters on plate

You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

Tanya holding a plate of saltfish fritters

We never called them "stamp-and-go" growing up. They were just frittas, and we usually had them for breakfast. I got my mom to actually write down her steps so I could share the recipe with you here.

Like my banana fritters, it comes together with a loose batter that fries up fast on the stovetop.

If you like cooking with saltfish, try my ackee and saltfish and callaloo and saltfish too.

Happy Cooking,

Tanya

Jamaican Saltfish Fritters at a Glance

  • Prep Time: 15 minutes
  • Cook Time: 10 minutes
  • Total Time: 25 minutes
  • Serves: 6
  • Best For: Breakfast, snacks, appetizers, Caribbean spreads

Ingredients Needed for Saltfish Fritters

Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

  • Salted Fish (Cod) - Saltfish, also known as salted cod or salt cod, is a type of preserved fish that has been dried and cured. If you can't find salted cod, you can use fresh cod fish that has been cooked and flaked.
  • Flour - all-purpose flour is the base of the fritter.
  • Cold water - helps create the loose batter.
  • Fresh seasoning - green onions, tomato, and fresh thyme.
  • Scotch bonnet pepper - A popular ingredient found in many Jamaican recipes. It's optional if you want a little spice.
  • Seasoning - all-purpose seasoning and black pepper.
  • Oil - for frying. Use a high-heat oil like canola, vegetable, or avocado oil.
ingredients for saltfish fritters on white background

    How to make Saltfish Fritters

    Full recipe instructions with exact measurements are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    Prepare the Salted Codfish

    Salted cod needs to be prepped before it goes into the batter. Rinse the saltfish, then place it in a large pot, cover with about 2 inches of water, and bring to a boil. Boil for 10-12 minutes, then drain to remove excess salt. Foam will rise to the top while it boils, so watch the pot so it doesn't boil over. Once the salt is out, flake the fish, and you're ready to go.

    You can also soak the salt cod in water for 24 hours, changing the water a few times. Once it's tender, boil for 4-5 minutes, drain, and flake.

    Fresh cod works too. Just season and bake the codfish, let it cool, then flake it into the batter.

    tongs lifting codfish out of boiling water in pot
    fritters shredded in bowl

    Prepare the fritter batter

    Chop your green onions, tomato, scotch bonnet pepper, and thyme, and place them in a large bowl along with the prepared codfish. Add the all-purpose seasoning and black pepper and stir until combined. Add all-purpose flour and stir.

    Slowly pour in the cold water and mix. The batter should easily slide off a spoon.

    saltfish batter pouring off spoon

    Fry the fritters

    Heat 1 ½ cups of oil in a large non-stick skillet over medium heat, to about 350°F. To test it, drop in a little batter. If it sizzles and rises right away, the oil's ready. Add the batter by spoonfuls, about ¼ of a cup per fritter. Once bubbles start to appear on the top and the bottom is golden brown, flip the fritter. This should take about 3-4 minutes per side.

    Remove the fritters from the skillet with tongs or a slotted spoon. Drain them on a wire rack. Serve them as is or serve them with a dipping sauce. I like to eat them as is.

    saltfish frying on stove in oil
    fried saltfish being picked up out of oil in skillet
    hand holding up saltfish fritter

    Frequently Asked Questions

    What to serve with saltfish fritters?

    This popular Jamaican appetizer is usually served as part of breakfast or a snack. You could serve them as part of a larger feast for friends and family. Serve them along with jerk chicken, jerk pork, cornmeal porridge, and more.

    Can these be made in an air fryer?

    To make these in an air fryer, reduce the liquid to thicken the batter a bit. It won't have the exact taste or texture of the fritters fried in oil.

    What is saltfish?

    Salted codfish, or salt fish, is a type of preserved seafood made by salting and then drying fish. The salt draws moisture from the fish, creating a firm texture that lasts for months or even years when stored properly.

    Saltfish can be found in International markets or online.

    Tanya's Notes on Saltfish Fritters

    • I use half a Scotch bonnet pepper in this recipe, which adds a little spice. Habanero pepper can be substituted for Scotch bonnet pepper, or simply left out. You can also use a hot pepper sauce.
    • The amount of water used will depend on the fritters' final results. Less water will yield a thicker, denser fritter, while more water will yield a thinner, crisper fritter.
    • The amount of salt added to this recipe will depend on how much salt was removed from the salted cod. Do not add additional salt until after you have fried and tasted one fritter.
    • I use a large 12-inch skillet for frying these fritters. If using a smaller skillet, like a 10-inch, you can use less oil, about 1 cup.

    A Likkle History of Saltfish Fritters

    Saltfish fritters, also known in Jamaica as stamp and go, are rooted in the long history of salted cod in the Caribbean. Many food writers connect them to older Spanish and Portuguese bacalao fritters that traveled across the Atlantic with the cod trade. The name “stamp and go” is widely believed to echo a British naval order to act fast, which suits a quick, hot snack you can eat on the move.

    hand breaking saltfish fritters apart

    I hope you enjoy these fritters as much as we do 🙂

    Other Jamaican Snacks

    • Jamaican festival
    saltfish fritters on plate
    Print Recipe
    5 from 3 votes

    Jamaican Saltfish Fritters Recipes

    If you're looking for a delicious and authentic Jamaican dish, look no further than these saltfish fritters. These golden fried fritters are savory and full of delicious Caribbean flavor.
    Prep Time15 minutes mins
    Cook Time10 minutes mins
    Total Time25 minutes mins
    Course: Breakfast
    Cuisine: Caribbean
    Keyword: codfish fritters, jamaican saltfish fritters, saltfish fritters
    Servings: 6 people
    Calories: 335kcal
    Author: Tanya Harris

    Ingredients

    • 12 oz dried salted fish
    • 3 green onions finely chopped
    • 1 large Roma tomato finely chopped
    • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme leaves removed from stem and chopped
    • ½ scotch bonnet pepper seeds removed and chopped (optional)
    • ¾ teaspoon black pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon all-purpose seasoning
    • 2 cups all-purpose flour
    • 1 ¼ - 1 ½ cup cold water*
    • Oil for frying about 1 ½ cup

    Instructions

    Prepare the saltfish

    • Rinse the saltfish. Place the salt fish in a large pot and cover with about 2 inches of water and bring it to a boil. Allow the saltfish to boil in the water for 10-12 minutes and then drain the water to remove excess salt.
    • You can also soak the salt cod in water for 24 hours, changing the water several times. Once it is fully soaked and tender, boil the codfish for 4-5 minutes, drain the cod, flake it into small pieces, and use it in your fritter batter.

    Prepare the fritter batter

    • Add prepared saltfish, green onions, roma tomato, thyme, scotch bonnet pepper, black pepper, and all-purpose seasoning to a bowl and mix until combined. Add all-purpose flour and stir until combined.
    • Slowly add water and stir until combined. The batter should easily slide off a spoon.

    Fry the fritter batter

    • Heat 1 ½ cups of oil in a large non-stick skillet over medium heat, to about 350°F. To test it, drop in a little batter. If it sizzles and rises right away, the oil's ready. Add batter by the spoonful, about ¼ cup each. Once bubbles start to appear on the top and the bottom is golden brown, flip the fritter. This should take about 3-4 minutes per side. Remove and serve.

    Notes

    • The amount of water used will depend on the fritters' final results. Less water will give a thicker, denser fritter while more water will give a thin, crispy fritter.
    • While boiling the saltfish, foam will form on the surface of the water. Watch closely to make sure the foam does not boil over the top of the pot.
    • To sub fresh fish in this recipe, season and bake the fresh codfish before using it in the fritter batter. If using fresh cod, you may need to add a little salt to the batter, about ½ teaspoon.
    • I use half a Scotch bonnet pepper in this recipe, which adds a little spice. Habanero pepper can be subbed for scotch bonnet pepper or simply leave it out. You can also use a hot pepper sauce.
    • The amount of salt added to this recipe will depend on how much salt was removed from the salted cod. Do not add additional salt until after you have fried and tasted one fritter.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 335kcal

    This post was originally published on May 1, 2022. It has been updated with new information and photos.

    Black-Eyed Pea Salad

    May 22, 2026 by Tanya Harris 10 Comments

    Like a pea salad in a bowl with a spoon lifting it up

    Made from scratch and tossed in an irresistible vinaigrette dressing, this black-eyed pea salad is all sorts of delicious. Simple to make, it's a side dish that is a real crowd pleaser!

    Like a pea salad in a bowl with a spoon lifting it up

    You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

    Tanya holding a bowl of black eyed peas, smiling

    I first had black-eyed pea salad on a trip to Nashville, TN, at Hattie B's restaurant, and I was hooked. I loved it so much that making it at home was a must.

    My recipe is adapted from the restaurant's version, but it differs slightly. I quickly soak my beans in water and smoked paprika, then combine them with a vinaigrette made with two kinds of vinegar, jalapeños, scallions, and herbs.

    In the South, black-eyed peas are part of the culture, especially on New Year's Day, for a little luck and prosperity. But this salad is too good to save for one day a year. I make it all spring and summer for cookouts and potlucks. If it doesn't bring you wealth, at least it tastes really, really good.

    As someone who loves black-eyed peas, I have a few other recipes for you to try, like my Black-Eyed Pea Recipe and BBQ Black-Eyed Pea Dip.

    Happy Cooking,

    Tanya

    Black-Eyed Pea Salad at a Glance

    • Prep Time: 10 minutes
    • Cook Time: 1 hour 45 minutes (includes the quick soak)
    • Total Time: 1 hour 55 minutes
    • Serves: 8
    • Best For: Cookouts, potlucks, New Year's Day, make-ahead sides

    A Quick Look at the Ingredients

    Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    For the Vinaigrette

    • Extra virgin olive oil - The base of the dressing.
    • White distilled vinegar and malt vinegar - Two vinegars give the dressing more depth than one. Malt vinegar brings a little something extra. If you don't have malt vinegar, apple cider vinegar works as a substitute.
    • Fresh thyme and parsley, red bell pepper, jalapeño, green onions, and garlic.
    • Black pepper and kosher salt

    For the Black-Eyed Peas

    • Dried black-eyed peas - I cook these from scratch. It's worth it. If you prefer a quicker version, you can use canned beans. I'd suggest 2 15-oz cans, drained.
    • Smoked paprika - Cooked right into the peas so they have flavor before they ever hit the dressing. Smoked paprika adds a touch of smokiness to our beans.
    • Water or stock - Stock if you want a little more flavor in the peas, but honestly, for this recipe, water works just fine.
    Ingredients for black eyed pea salad on table.

    How to make black-eyed pea salad

    Make the vinaigrette

    Combine the olive oil, white vinegar, malt vinegar, thyme, parsley, black pepper, and salt in a large bowl and whisk. Stir in the diced red bell pepper, jalapeño, green onions, and garlic. Cover and refrigerate while you cook the peas.

    vinaigrette for the black eyed pea salad in bowl

    Cook the black-eyed peas

    Place the peas, smoked paprika, and water in a large pot and bring to a boil over high heat. Let them boil hard for 2 minutes, then remove from heat, cover, and let sit for 1 hour.

    Set the pot back over medium heat, bring to a simmer, and cover. Cook for 20 to 45 minutes, stirring occasionally, until the peas are tender but not mushy. Drain and add to a large bowl.

    Spoon lifting cooked black eyed peas out of the pot.
    cooked black eyed peas in collander being drained by Tanya

    Combine

    Pour the vinaigrette over the hot peas and stir. Serve right away or chill first. Taste and add salt and pepper if needed.

    spoon holding black eye pea salad

    Serving Suggestions

    This is a great side for almost any main. It's right at home next to collard greens and cornbread, and it goes with grilled chicken, ham, steak, or fish. You can also turn it into a light meal on its own by stirring in leftover chopped chicken or ham.

    Can you make it ahead of time?

    Yes, and you should. Toss the peas with the dressing, let them cool, then cover and refrigerate. It keeps well for 3 to 5 days, and the flavor only gets better as it sits. You can also make just the vinaigrette up to 5 days ahead and keep it in the fridge until you're ready.

    Tanya's Top Tips

    • Toss the peas while they're hot. Hot peas soak up the dressing better than cold ones. Don't wait.
    • Don't overcook the peas. Pull them while they're tender but still hold their shape. Mushy peas make a sad salad.
    • Make it ahead. This is one of those dishes that's better on day two, so it's perfect for prepping before a cookout.
    • Taste at the end. Salt depends on whether you used water or stock. Always taste before serving.
    Tanya holding a spoon with the peas on it

    More Side Dishes You Might Like

    • Southern Style Macaroni Salad - Creamy, mayo-based, with bacon and a diced apple that ties it all together.
    • Potato Salad - The classic cookout side.
    black eyed pea salad in bowl
    Print Recipe
    5 from 3 votes

    Black-Eyed Pea Salad Recipe

    Made from scratch and tossed in a tangy vinaigrette dressing, this black eyed pea salad is all sorts of delicious. Simple to make, it's a delicious side dish that is a real crowd pleaser!
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time1 hour hr 45 minutes mins
    Total Time1 hour hr 55 minutes mins
    Course: Side Dish
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: black eyed pea salad dressing, black eyed pea salad from scratch, how to make black eyed pea salad
    Servings: 8 servings
    Calories: 274kcal
    Author: Tanya Harris

    Ingredients

    For the Vinaigrette:

    • ½ cup extra virgin olive oil
    • ¼ cup white distilled Vinegar
    • ¼ cup malt vinegar
    • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme minced
    • 1 teaspoon fresh parsley minced
    • 2 teaspoons ground black pepper
    • 2 teaspoons kosher salt
    • 1 red bell pepper diced
    • 2 jalapeno peppers stems and seeds removed, and diced
    • 2 green onions finely chopped
    • 1 garlic clove minced

    For the Black Eyed Peas:

    • 2 cups dried Black-eye peas
    • 1 tablespoon smoked paprika
    • 6 cups water or stock

    Instructions

    Create the vinaigrette

    • Create the vinaigrette by combining extra virgin olive oil, white vinegar, malt vinegar, thyme, parsley, black pepper, and salt in a large bowl and whisk to combine. Stir in red bell pepper, jalapeno peppers, green onions, and garlic clove. Cover and place in the refrigerator.

    Cook the black-eye peas

    • Place peas, smoked paprika, and water in a large pot and bring to a boil over high heat. Allow the peas to rigorously boil for 2 minutes. Then remove from heat and cover the pot. Allow it to sit for 1 hour.
    • When ready to cook, place the pot over medium-heat and bring the pot of beans water to a simmer and cover. Cook covered for 20-45 minutes, stirring occasionally until the beans are tender, but not mushy. Remove from heat and drain the liquid from the beans. Place beans in a large bowl.

    Combine

    • Pour the vinaigrette over the hot beans and stir to combine. You can serve as is or allow to cool in the fridge before serving. Add additional salt and pepper to taste if needed. Serve and enjoy.

    Video

    Notes

    • You can make the vinaigrette 3 to 5 days ahead of time and keep it refrigerated.
    • If you don't like spicy foods, you can omit the jalapeno. Add in more if you like it a bit spicier!
    • Take care not to overcook the black eyed peas or they will become very soft and mushy.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 274kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 599mg | Potassium: 543mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1001IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 4mg

    Post was originally published on November 22nd, 2021. It has been updated with new photos and information.

    Chicken and Sausage Gumbo Recipe (Classic Cajun-Style)

    May 20, 2026 by Tanya Harris Leave a Comment

    gumbo in a bowl with rice on top with green onions

    This chicken and sausage gumbo recipe is a classic Cajun-style gumbo built on a deep, dark roux and the holy trinity of onion, bell pepper, and celery. It’s a bowl of comforting, flavorful stew.

    gumbo in a bowl with rice on top with green onions

    You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

    Tanya holding a bowl of gumbo, smiling at the camera.

    I've been cooking this gumbo for years. Gumbo was actually the first thing I made when I took a culinary class, and I had to get it right before it ever appeared here on the blog.

    It sits right alongside my Red Beans and Rice, Dirty Rice, and New Orleans BBQ Shrimp on the comfort food rotation.

    I cook this gumbo on cool weekends, game days, and anytime I want one big pot of food that will feed a crowd and taste even better the next day. The flavor comes from time and patience with the roux, so plan to be in the kitchen for a stretch. Once that roux hits a deep chocolate color, the rest of the recipe moves quickly, as long as you prepped correctly.

    Happy Cooking,

    Tanya

    Chicken and Sausage Gumbo at a Glance

    • Prep Time: 20 minutes
    • Cook Time: 3 hours (includes 2 hours for the oven roux and 1 hour to build and simmer the gumbo)
    • Total Time: 3 hours 20 minutes
    • Serves: 8 people
    • Best For: Cool weather dinners, Sunday cooking, game day, feeding a crowd

    A Quick Look at The Ingredients

    Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    For the Roux

    • Vegetable oil and all-purpose flour - Equal parts oil and flour cooked down to a dark chocolate color. This is the heart of the gumbo and where the flavor lives. Use a neutral oil like vegetable or canola so the roux can do its job.

    Meat

    • Boneless skinless chicken thighs - I prefer thighs over chicken breast because they stay tender through the long simmer. If you want to use bone-in thighs for extra flavor, you can absolutely do that. Just pull the meat off the bone before serving.
    • Andouille sausage -  Andouille is a smoked Cajun pork sausage, and it is the traditional choice. If you cannot find it, a good smoked sausage or kielbasa will work. Avoid anything with cheese or sweet seasonings.

    The Holy Trinity and Aromatics

    • Yellow onion, green bell pepper, and celery - This is the Cajun holy trinity, and it is the aromatic base of the gumbo. Do not swap these out. This helps make an authentic gumbo.
    • Garlic - Fresh garlic adds depth.

    Seasoning and Liquid

    • Cajun seasoning - I use any Cajun seasoning blend I have on hand. Whether it's my homemade blend or a store-bought blend. I like this one or this one. Taste before adding more salt since most blends already have plenty.
    • Dried thyme, dried oregano, Cayenne pepper, Bay leaves
    • Chicken stock or broth - I prefer low-sodium. It gives you control over the salt level. Homemade chicken stock is great if you have it on hand.
    • Worcestershire sauce - Adds a savory backbone to the broth.
    • Sliced okra - Okra adds body and that classic gumbo texture. Frozen sliced okra works fine.

    For Serving

    • Cooked white rice, long-grain or jasmine.
    • Chopped green onions for topping.
    • A pinch of gumbo filé powder is sprinkled into each bowl off the heat. Optional but classic.
    • Hot sauce at the table.
    Ingredients for gumbo on tabletop with labels

    How to Make Chicken and Sausage Gumbo

    This recipe walks through my preferred oven roux method, which lets the roux develop slowly in the oven without all the standing and stirring at the stove. I have also included the stovetop roux method in the recipe card if you want to go that route. Either way, the rest of the process is the same. The full directions are in the recipe card below.

    Make the Dark Roux

    Heat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit. Add ½ cup vegetable oil and ½ cup all-purpose flour to a large Dutch oven, whisking until smooth with no lumps. Slide the pot into the oven uncovered.

    Stir every 30 minutes, scraping the bottom and sides, until the roux reaches a deep chocolate brown color, about 1 ½ to 2 hours. The smell will turn nutty and toasty. If you see black flecks or smell anything acrid, the roux is burned, and you have to start over. A burned roux will ruin the gumbo.

    Dark roux in pot, in oven.

    Brown the sausage and chicken

    While the roux is in the oven, heat a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the sliced andouille in an even layer and cook until browned on both sides, then transfer to a plate.

    Add the chicken thighs to the same skillet and sear in batches until nicely browned on both sides. Move the chicken to the plate with the sausage. Once cool enough to handle, chop the chicken into 1-inch pieces. Keep any juices that collect on the plate.

    Browning and andouille sausage in skillet
    Chicken browning in a skillet
    Tanya chopping chicken after searing

    Cook the trinity

    Remove the finished roux from the oven and set the Dutch oven over medium heat on the stovetop. Stir in the chopped onion, green bell pepper, and celery.

    Cook, stirring often, until the vegetables soften and the onion turns translucent, about 5 minutes. Add the minced garlic and cook just until fragrant, about 1 minute. The mixture will be glossy and thick at this point.

    Holy Trinity being stirred into roux

    Build the Gumbo Base

    Add the browned sausage and chicken directly to the pot, along with any juices from the plate. Sprinkle in the Cajun seasoning, thyme, oregano, and cayenne.

    Pour in the chicken stock and Worcestershire sauce, stirring as you go so the roux melts smoothly into the liquid. Lay the bay leaves on top. Bring the pot up to a gentle boil, then immediately lower the heat to a steady simmer.

    Ingredients for gumbo being mixed with a spatula before broth is added
    Chicken broth being poured into pot, making gumbo.
    Gumbo and Pop with bay leaves before simmering

    Simmer low and slow

    Partially cover the pot and simmer the gumbo for 45 minutes to 1 hour, stirring occasionally. Skim any fat that rises to the top if you like.

    The broth will deepen in color, and the flavors will pull together. When there are about 15 minutes left, add the okra.

    Okra being put in gumbo stew

    Finish and serve

    Take the pot off the heat and fish out the bay leaves. Taste and season with salt and black pepper. Spoon the gumbo into bowls over hot cooked white rice. Sprinkle a pinch of gumbo filé powder over each bowl, top with chopped green onions, and pass hot sauce at the table.

    Gumbo being poured into a bowl with a ladle
    Spoon picking up gumbo out of pot

    Variations

    • Add shrimp. Stir in 1 pound of peeled, deveined shrimp during the last 5 to 7 minutes of simmering until they curl and turn pink.
    • Use bone-in chicken thighs. Sear them skin-side down, simmer them whole, then pull the meat off the bones before serving.
    • Make it spicier. Bump up the cayenne, add a few dashes of hot sauce while it simmers, or use a spicier andouille.
    • Swap the sausage. Smoked turkey sausage or smoked kielbasa works if you cannot find andouille.
    • Skip the okra. If you are not into okra, leave it out and lean on the roux and filé powder for body.

    Serving Suggestions

    Gumbo is meant to be served over cooked rice. I usually go with long-grain white rice, but my Garlic Butter Rice is a nice upgrade when I want a little extra richness. For a Southern spread, I serve it with the Classic Southern Cornbread Recipe. You can also add a giant scoop of potato salad to calm down the spiciness. Yes, this is one way that gumbo is served, and it’s delicious. 

    Gumbo in a bowl with rice on top, sprinkled with green onions

    How Dark Should the Roux Be?

    For a Cajun-style chicken and sausage gumbo, you want the roux to go all the way to a dark chocolate brown. It will look almost like melted dark chocolate or a peanut shell. A lighter roux gives you more thickening power but less flavor. A darker roux thickens less but gives you that deep, smoky, almost coffee-like flavor that defines a good gumbo.

    I prefer the oven roux method because it lets the roux develop without the constant babysitting required on the stovetop. You still need to stir every 30 minutes, but you can do other things in between. If you do go the stovetop route, stay at the stove the whole time and stir nonstop with a flat wooden spoon. If you smell anything acrid or see black flecks, throw it out and start over. There is no saving a burned roux.

    I’d also like to mention that your stove will determine how easily—and how quickly—your roux turns brown. I cook on multiple cooktops, and I’ve noticed that on certain induction burners, it took a long time to get my roux dark, almost 2 hours in one instance. With gas, I reached that chocolate color in about 35-40 minutes. Just keep that in mind when making a roux on the stovetop.

    Make Ahead and Storage

    • Storage: Cool the gumbo and transfer it to an airtight container. Store in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. The flavor actually improves overnight.
    • Freezing: Cool completely, portion into freezer-safe containers without the rice, and freeze for up to 3 months.
    • Reheating: Thaw overnight in the refrigerator if frozen. Warm gently on the stovetop over medium-low heat, adding a splash of chicken stock if it has thickened too much. Cook fresh rice to serve.
    • Prep Plan: You can absolutely prep this gumbo ahead. Make the roux and let it cool completely, then scrape it into a clean jar or airtight container and stash it in the fridge for a couple of weeks. When you’re ready to cook, scoop the cold roux into your Dutch oven and warm it over low heat just until it loosens up, then add the onion, bell pepper, and celery and keep going with the recipe.
    Hand holding spoon, picking gumbo out of pot

    Tanya's Top Tips

    • Get the roux dark. This is the most important step. A pale roux will give you a pale, flat-tasting gumbo. Push it to a deep chocolate brown. Cooking it in the oven will give you the best control of reaching this color without burning the roux. 
    • Use low-sodium chicken stock. Cajun seasoning and andouille both bring salt to the pot. Low-sodium stock lets you season at the end without making your gumbo too salty.
    • Brown the meats well. Do not crowd the skillet. A real sear on the sausage and chicken builds another layer of flavor.
    • Taste at the end. Salt levels vary depending on your stock, seasoning blend, and sausage. Always taste before adding more.
    • Sprinkle filé off the heat. Add a pinch to individual bowls right before serving.

    That seems like a lot, but it's so worth it. If you can, make this and enjoy it the day after for the very best flavor. Oh, and this thing freezes like a champ. I hope you enjoy this one as much as we do.

    Gumbo in a bowl with green onions on top
    Print Recipe
    No ratings yet

    Chicken and Sausage Gumbo Recipe

    This chicken and sausage gumbo recipe is a classic Cajun-style gumbo built on a deep, dark roux and the holy trinity of onion, bell pepper, and celery. It’s a bowl of comforting stew that is full of flavor.
    Prep Time20 minutes mins
    Cook Time3 hours hrs
    Total Time3 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
    Course: Main Course
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: chicken and sausage gumbo
    Servings: 8 people
    Calories: 455kcal
    Author: Tanya Harris

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup vegetable oil
    • ½ cup all-purpose flour
    • 1 ½ cups chopped yellow onion
    • 1 cup chopped green bell pepper
    • 1 cup chopped celery
    • 8 cloves garlic minced
    • 1 lb boneless skinless chicken thighs
    • 14 oz andouille sausage sliced into half rounds
    • 1 tablespoon Cajun seasoning
    • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
    • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
    • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper optional, for additional heat
    • 4 cups chicken stock or broth preferably low-sodium
    • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
    • 2 bay leaves
    • 1 ½ cups sliced okra 8–10 pods or frozen
    • Salt and freshly ground black pepper to taste
    • 1 pinch gumbo filé powder for serving
    • Cooked white rice for serving
    • Chopped green onions for serving

    Instructions

    Oven Roux (primary method)

    • Heat the oven to 350°F. Add the oil and flour to a large Dutch oven and whisk until there are no lumps. Slide the pot into the oven, uncovered, and cook, giving it a good stir every 30 minutes, until the roux is a deep chocolate-brown color, about 1 ½ to 2 hours.

    Stovetop Roux (alternate method)

    • Add the oil to a large, heavy pot or Dutch oven and set it over medium-low heat. Whisk in the flour until smooth. Cook, stirring nonstop, until the roux darkens to a milk chocolate–to–dark chocolate color, 30 to 45 minutes, adjusting the heat as needed so it darkens slowly without scorching. Once it reaches the color you like, pull the pot off the heat for a minute to cool it slightly.

    Building the Gumbo

    • While the oven roux is cooking (or before starting a stovetop roux, if that’s easier for you), place a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the andouille slices in an even layer and cook until browned on both sides, then transfer the sausage to a plate. Add the chicken to the same skillet and sear in batches until nicely browned. Move the chicken to the plate with the sausage, along with any juices that collect, then chop the chicken into 1‑inch pieces.
    • When the roux is ready—whether you made it in the oven or on the stovetop—set that pot over medium heat. Stir in the onion, bell pepper, and celery. Cook, stirring often, until the vegetables soften, about 5 minutes. Add the garlic and cook just until fragrant, about 1 minute.
    • Add the browned sausage and chicken, plus any juices on the plate, straight into the pot with the roux and vegetables. Sprinkle in the Cajun seasoning, thyme, oregano, cayenne (if using).
    • Pour in 4 cups of chicken stock and the Worcestershire sauce, stirring as you go so everything combines into a smooth base. Lay the bay leaves on top. Bring the pot up to a gentle boil, then immediately lower the heat to keep it at a steady simmer. Partially cover the pot and let the gumbo cook for 45 minutes to 1 hour, stirring now and then.
    • Stir in the okra and let the gumbo simmer for another 15 minutes.
    • Take the pot off the heat and fish out the bay leaves. Taste and season with salt and black pepper until it tastes right to you.
    • Spoon the gumbo over bowls of hot cooked white rice. If you like, sprinkle a pinch of gumbo filé over each bowl just before serving. Finish each bowl with chopped green onions before serving.

    Notes

    • The roux is the heart of the gumbo. Push it to a deep chocolate brown for full Cajun flavor. If it smells acrid or develops black flecks, discard and start over.
    • Use low-sodium chicken stock so you can control the salt at the end. Cajun seasoning and andouille both bring salt to the pot.
    • Gumbo tastes even better the next day. Store in the refrigerator for up to 4 days or freeze without the rice for up to 3 months.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 455kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 31g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 11g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 100mg | Sodium: 959mg | Potassium: 664mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 793IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 60mg | Iron: 3mg

    Lemon Crinkle Cookies from Scratch

    May 18, 2026 by Tanya Harris 24 Comments

    lemon crinkle cookies on a baking sheet.

    I love lemon desserts, so making these lemon crinkle cookies from scratch was a must. They’re soft, chewy, full of bright lemon flavor, and finished with that classic powdered sugar crinkle on top.

    lemon crinkle cookies on a baking sheet.

    You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

    I have a love-love relationship with lemon-flavored everything. I love lemonade, lemon meringue pie, and lemon cookies. So I decided that I had to make lemon crinkle cookies from scratch for the Spring.

    Most lemon crinkle cookie recipes I found used cake mix, but I wanted one made from scratch with ingredients I already keep on hand. After plenty of testing, I landed on a version that’s soft, crinkly, and full of bright lemon flavor.

    I made these Lemon Crinkle cookies this past weekend, and they were a huge hit! So light and delicious. Thanks for sharing the recipe.

    - Jeremiah

    A Quick Look at the Ingredients

    Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    • Dry ingredients: All-purpose flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt give the cookies structure and help create that soft, chewy texture.
    • Butter and sugar: Butter adds rich flavor, while granulated sugar sweetens the dough and helps create a tender cookie.
    • Egg and vanilla extract: These add flavor and help bring the dough together.
    • Lemon zest and lemon juice: These are the key ingredients for that fresh lemon flavor. The zest adds bold citrus flavor, while the juice brings a little tang.
    • Yellow food coloring: This is optional, but it gives the cookies a brighter yellow color.
    • Granulated sugar and powdered sugar for rolling: Rolling the dough in granulated sugar first, then powdered sugar, helps create the classic crinkle look as the cookies bake.
    Ingredients for Lemon Crinkle Cookies with Labels

    How to make lemon crinkle cookies

    Step 1

    Prep the oven and baking sheet. Preheat your oven to 325°F and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Mix the dry ingredients. In a medium bowl, whisk together the flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt. Set aside.

    Dry ingredients in a bowl with a whisk.

    Step 2

    Cream the butter and sugar. In a large bowl, beat the softened butter and 1 cup of granulated sugar until light and fluffy.

    Add the wet ingredients. Mix in the egg, vanilla extract, lemon zest, lemon juice, and yellow food coloring, if using.

    Lemon crinkle cookie mixture being mixed together
    butter and sugar creamed with wet ingredients added

    Step 3

    Combine the dough. Add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients and mix just until the dough comes together.

    Roll the cookies. Scoop about 1 ½ tablespoons of dough and roll into balls. Roll each ball first in granulated sugar, then in powdered sugar.

    And crinkle cookie dough kind of mushed together
    3 bows, 1 with cookie dough, 1 with powdered sugar, and 1 with granulated sugar

    Step 3

    Roll the cookies. Scoop about 1 ½ tablespoons of dough and roll into balls. Roll each ball first in granulated sugar, then in powdered sugar.

    Bake. Place the cookie dough balls on the prepared baking sheet and bake for 14 to 16 minutes.

    Crinkle cookies on baking sheet before baking
    Lemon Crinkle Cookies on baking sheet after baking

    Step 5

    Cool and serve. Let the cookies cool on the baking sheet for a few minutes, then transfer them to a wire rack to cool completely.

    Lemon crinkle cookies on the wire rack.

    What are lemon crinkle cookies?

    Lemon crinkle cookies are soft, chewy cookies flavored with fresh lemon zest and juice. They have a sweet, tangy taste, balanced with a light, fluffy texture.

    Lemon crinkle cookie with bite taken out

    Can you make lemon crinkle cookies in advance?

    Yes, you can make lemon crinkle cookies in advance. The dough can be prepared ahead of time and stored in the refrigerator for up to 2 days, or in the freezer for up to 3 months. Baked cookies can also be stored in an airtight container at room temperature for up to a week, or in the freezer for up to 3 months.

    How do you store leftover lemon crinkle cookies?

    Store leftover lemon crinkle cookies in an airtight container at room temperature for up to a week. To keep them fresh for longer, you can also freeze the cookies in a freezer-safe container or resealable plastic bag.

    I hope you enjoy this lemon crinkle cookie recipe as much as we do.

    Looking for more Cookie Recipes? Try these Out:

    • Chocolate Chip Pecan Cookies
    • Oatmeal Lace Cookies
    • 3 Ingredient Pumpkin Cookies
    lemon crinkle cookies on a baking sheet.
    Print Recipe
    4.55 from 31 votes

    Lemon Crinkle Cookies From Scratch

    These lemon crinkle cookies from scratch are perfect for beautiful sunny days.
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time15 minutes mins
    Total Time25 minutes mins
    Course: Dessert
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: cookie recipes, lemon crinkle cookies, lemon crinkle cookies from scratch
    Servings: 24 cookies
    Calories: 111.8kcal
    Author: Tanya Harris

    Equipment

    • Stand Mixer
    • Baking Sheet

    Ingredients

    • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour
    • ¼ teaspoon baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ⅛ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ cup unsalted butter 8 tablespoons, softened
    • 1 cup granulated sugar
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1 large egg
    • 1.5 teaspoon freshly grated lemon zest
    • 1 tablespoon freshly squeezed lemon juice
    • 2 dashes yellow food coloring optional
    • ¼ cup granulated sugar
    • ¼ cup powdered sugar

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 325 degrees Fahrenheit.
    • Combine flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt in bowl. Set aside.
    • Cream butter and sugar until light and fluffy. Add egg, vanilla extract, lemon zest, lemon juice, and yellow food coloring and mix well.
    • Add flour mixture into butter mixture and mix until dough is just combined. 
    • Pick ½ tablespoons of the the dough and roll into ball. Place granulated sugar and powdered sugar in separate shallow plate. Roll cookie dough in granulated sugar, then in powdered sugar. Then place balls on baking sheets.
    • Bake in preheated oven for 14-16 minutes. Remove from oven. Finish cooling on cooling rack.

    Video

    Notes

    • Rolling the dough in granulated sugar first, then powdered sugar, helps create that classic crinkle look.
    • For best results, make sure the dough is at room temperature when rolling so the cookies spread properly.
    • Don’t overbake these cookies. They should be set on the edges and still soft in the center.
    • Store leftover cookies in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 1 week.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 111.8kcal

    Adapted from Mel's Kitchen Cafe.

    This post was originally published on April 10, 2017. It has been updated with additional helpful information.

    Easy Banana Pudding Recipe

    May 15, 2026 by Tanya Harris 2 Comments

    Banana pudding in a glass jar with a spoon sticking out

    This banana pudding recipe is creamy, no-bake, and always a favorite. Layers of vanilla wafers, fresh banana slices, and a rich pudding made with sweetened condensed milk and homemade whipped cream make this a dessert that disappears fast at any gathering.

    Banana pudding in a glass jar with a spoon sticking out

    You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

    When you're holding banana pudding and smiling

    Banana pudding is one of those desserts I cannot pass up. At a family cookout, at a restaurant, at a potluck, if it's there, I'm getting some. It has always been one of my all-time favorites.

    This version is how I prefer to make it at home because it's genuinely easy. It has condensed milk, heavy cream, and Vanilla wafers. It's the same approach that made Magnolia Bakery's banana pudding famous. I've tweaked it a bit to add a layer of whipped cream on top. It's my favorite way to enjoy it.

    If you love banana recipes, you might also want to try my Best Banana Bread Recipe or my Jamaican Banana Fritters.

    Love, Tanya

    Banana Pudding At a Glance

    This version is so easy, as you don't have to make the pudding on the stove. I also use a homemade whipped cream, keeping the banana pudding creamy and delicious.

    • Prep Time: 20 minutes
    • Chill Time: 4 hours (overnight preferred)
    • Total Time: 4 hours 20 minutes
    • Serves: 10 to 12
    • Best For: Potlucks, holidays, Sunday dinners, make-ahead desserts

    A Quick Look at The Ingredients

    Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    • Heavy cream — Use cold heavy cream for the best whipped cream. It whips faster and holds its shape better.
    • Powdered sugar — I add this to my whipped cream mixture to sweeten a little. I want all my layers in my pudding to be delicious.
    • Vanilla extract — Adds flavor to both the whipped cream and the pudding base.
    • Sweetened condensed milk — This is what gives the pudding its richness.
    • Cold water — Used to thin out the condensed milk base before adding the pudding mix.
    • Instant vanilla pudding mix — Use instant, not cook-and-serve. This is what thickens everything up. I also use the large 5-ounce box for this recipe.
    • Vanilla wafers — One box (about 11 oz). They soften in the fridge and take on a cake-like texture once the pudding sets. You can also use Chessmen cookies if you prefer.
    • Ripe bananas — You want bananas with a few brown spots — ripe but still firm enough to hold their shape in the layers.
    Ingredients for Banana Pudding with Labels

    How to Make Banana Pudding

    Step 1: Make the Whipped Cream

    In a large bowl, combine the heavy cream, powdered sugar, and ½ teaspoon of vanilla extract. Whip until stiff peaks form, then set aside. Reserve about 1 ½ cups of the whipped cream for folding into the pudding. The rest will be used to top the finished dessert.

    Cream in a bowl being whipped

    Step 2: Make the Pudding Base

    In a separate large bowl, whisk together the sweetened condensed milk, cold water, and remaining vanilla extract until well combined. Add the instant pudding mix and whisk for about 2 minutes until smooth and thickened.

    Vanilla pudding, condensed milk, and water being stirred with the whisk

    Step 3: Fold in the Whipped Cream

    Gently fold the reserved 1 ½ cups of whipped cream into the pudding mixture using a spatula. Use a cut-and-lift motion so you don't deflate all the air you just whipped in.

    Folding the whipped cream into the vanilla pudding mix in a bowl
    The mix: the vanilla pudding and whipped cream mixed together in glass bowl

    Step 4: Layer and Chill

    Start layering in your dish or trifle bowl. Begin with vanilla wafers, then sliced bananas, then a layer of pudding. Repeat until everything is used up. Top with the remaining whipped cream and a few extra vanilla wafers. Refrigerate for at least 4 hours, or overnight.

    The top of the banana pudding with crushed Nilla wafers and whipped cream on top
    The side picture of vanilla pudding in a truffle glass trifle dish

    Variations

    • Individual servings: Layer everything into small mason jars or cups for easy party servings. This is my favorite way to serve it.
    • Fruit-filled version: Add some strawberries for a fruit-filled banana pudding.

    Serving Suggestions

    This banana pudding is a full dessert on its own, but it fits right in at a holiday table alongside a Southern Sweet Potato Pie or a Slow Cooker Peach Cobbler. Serve it cold, straight from the fridge.

    Make Ahead and Storage

    Storage: Store covered tightly in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. The bananas will continue to soften and may darken slightly, but the flavor holds up well.

    Freezing: I don't recommend freezing this recipe. The textures of the whipped cream and pudding change when frozen and thawed.

    Make Ahead: Best made the day before serving. Four hours is the minimum chill time, but overnight gives you the best results.

    Close-up photo of banana pudding on a spoon.

    Tanya's Top Tips

    • Use cold heavy cream. It whips faster and holds stiff peaks better than cream that's been sitting at room temperature.
    • Slice your bananas right before layering so they don't start browning before the pudding even chills.

    I hope you love this banana pudding recipe as much as we do. If you're looking for more dessert recipes, try these out:

    • Southern Sweet Potato Pie — A classic Southern dessert that's perfect for the holidays.
    • Slow Cooker Peach Cobbler — An easy, crowd-pleasing cobbler that practically makes itself.
    • Homemade Chocolate Pudding — Rich, creamy chocolate pudding made from scratch.
    • Best Banana Bread Recipe — A great way to use up those overripe bananas.
    Banana pudding in a glass jar with a spoon sticking out and Nilla wafers surrounding the glass.
    Print Recipe
    5 from 1 vote

    Banana Pudding Recipe

    This easy banana pudding is creamy and no-bake. Layers of vanilla wafers, fresh banana slices, and a rich pudding made with sweetened condensed milk and homemade whipped cream.
    Prep Time20 minutes mins
    Chill Time4 hours hrs
    Total Time4 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
    Course: Dessert
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: banana pudding, banana pudding recipe
    Servings: 12 servings
    Calories: 181kcal
    Author: Tanya Harris

    Equipment

    • 1 Trifle Bowl
    • Dessert Cups

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups heavy cream
    • 3 tablespoons powdered sugar
    • 2 ½ teaspoons vanilla extract divided
    • 1 14 oz can sweetened condensed milk
    • 1 ½ cups cold water
    • 1 5 oz box instant vanilla pudding mix
    • 1 11 oz box vanilla wafers about 11 oz vanilla wafers
    • 4 medium ripe bananas sliced

    Instructions

    • In a large bowl, combine the heavy cream, powdered sugar, and ½ teaspoon of the vanilla extract. Whip until stiff peaks form. Reserve 1 ½ cups of the whipped cream for folding into the pudding. Set the rest aside for topping.
    • In a separate large bowl, whisk together the sweetened condensed milk, cold water, and remaining 2 teaspoons of vanilla extract until well combined.
    • Whisk in the instant pudding mix for about 2 minutes until smooth.
    • Gently fold the reserved 1 ½ cups of whipped cream into the pudding mixture using a spatula. Use a cut and lift motion to keep the air in.
    • Layer the pudding starting with vanilla wafers, then sliced bananas, then pudding. Repeat until all ingredients are used.
    • Top with the remaining whipped cream and extra vanilla wafers.
    • Refrigerate for at least 4 hours or overnight so the wafers soften into a cake-like texture.

    Video

    Notes

    • Use ripe but firm bananas so they hold their shape in the layers. Bananas with a few brown spots are ideal.
    • Slice the bananas right before layering to keep them from browning.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 181kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 45mg | Sodium: 14mg | Potassium: 180mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 608IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Homemade Hot Dog Chili

    May 14, 2026 by Tanya Harris 27 Comments

    hot dogs covered in chili

    This homemade hot dog chili is one of my favorite easy toppings for hot dogs. It’s made with simple ingredients, packed with flavor, and perfect for an easy family meal or summer cookout.

    hot dogs covered in chili

    You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

    Hands down, one of our family favorites is hot dogs. The kids love them, and they are so often requested, and Mom and Dad are pretty big fans, too!

    This hot-dog chili is a great addition and a great way to add some flavor and interest. Perfectly messy to eat!

    For more chili, be sure to check out my Instant Pot Chili and Turkey Chili recipes!

    A Quick Look at the Ingredients

    Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    • Ground beef – I use lean ground beef so the chili stays rich and flavorful without turning overly greasy. It also gives this homemade hot dog chili the perfect texture for spooning over hot dogs.
    • Tomato sauce – Use plain canned tomato sauce, not marinara. Tomato sauce gives this hot dog chili its smooth, classic base without extra herbs or seasonings competing with the flavor.
    • Ketchup – A little ketchup adds sweetness, helping create that classic chili dog topping flavor.
    • Ground mustard – mustard gives this chili its signature hot dog chili flavor.
    • Worcestershire sauce – Just a splash adds depth, savory flavor, and a little umami.
    • Seasonings – Chili powder, garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and cayenne pepper keep the flavor simple, classic, and kid-friendly while still giving the chili plenty of taste.
    • Water – Water helps everything simmer into a smooth, saucy, spoonable consistency that’s perfect for chili dogs. You can use chicken broth instead if you want to add a little extra flavor.
    Ingredients for Hot Dog Chili with Labels

    How to make hot dog chili

    Step 1

    Place the lean ground beef in a large, heavy-bottomed pot and cover it with water. Heat over medium-high heat, stirring to break up the clumps.

    This method skips browning the beef and boils it instead, resulting in crumbled ground beef that doesn't clump. Perfect for topping hot dogs.

    Beef in pot covered in water and browned

    Step 2

    Once the beef is cooked through and broken into fine crumbles, add the remaining ingredients to the pot.

    hot Dog chili ingredients in pot simmering.

    Step 3

    Stir, reduce the heat to low, and simmer for 45 minutes to 1 hour, stirring occasionally.

    hot dog chili in pot after cooking

    Step 4

    Serve over hot dogs or eat on its own.

    close up of chili on hot dog

    Can you make it ahead of time?

    Yes, this is a great make-ahead topping and is freezer-friendly too. Let the hot dog chili cool to room temperature before placing it in an airtight container. It will keep well for 4 days in the fridge and up to 6 months in the freezer.

    Thaw frozen chili in the fridge overnight, and reheat it gently on the stovetop to serve.

    Recipe Variations

    This recipe is pretty awesome as it is, but there are a few easy swaps you can make to make it your own. Increase the amount of cayenne if you prefer your chili on the spicy side, or swap the ground beef for turkey, chicken, or plant-based 'meat' crumbles.

    You can easily turn this into a fuller chili to serve as a main too if you like. Add sautéed vegetables like onions, carrots, and bell peppers, and stir in canned beans towards the end of cooking.

    three hot dogs covered in whicli and toppings

    Tanya's Notes and Tips

    • Use lean ground beef for this recipe. Beef with a higher fat content can make the hot dog chili oily.
    • Serve with more of your favorite toppings for a loaded dog! Shredded cheese, chopped onions, sliced jalapeno, and sour cream take it over the top!
    hot dog chili in pot with other ingredients surrounding it

    More Family Favorite Recipes

    • Oven-Baked Hot Dogs
    • Turkey Burgers
    • Rasta Pasta
    • Baked Macaroni and Cheese
    • Air Fryer Pizza

    I hope you love this recipe as much as we do. If you have tried this recipe or any other recipe on my blog, please rate it and let me know how it turned out in the comments below! Your feedback is invaluable and helps us grow. Thank you for your support!

    hot dogs covered in chili
    Print Recipe
    4.70 from 23 votes

    Hot Dog Chili Recipe

    This homemade hot dog chili is easy to make with simple ingredients and classic flavor. It’s the perfect topping for chili dogs, cookouts, and easy family dinners.
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time1 hour hr
    Total Time1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
    Course: Main Course
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: chili for hot dogs, homemade chili hot dogs
    Servings: 8 servings
    Calories: 113kcal
    Author: Tanya Harris

    Ingredients

    • 1 lb lean ground beef
    • 2 cups water
    • 15 oz can tomato sauce
    • ½ cup ketchup
    • 1 tablespoon chili powder or chili powder substitute
    • 1 teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
    • 1 teaspoon onion powder
    • ½ teaspoon ground mustard
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt or to taste
    • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper

    Instructions

    • Place ground beef in a heavy-bottomed large pot and cover with water. Heat over medium-high heat, stirring to break up the clumps.
    • Once the beef is cooked through and broken into fine crumbles, add the remaining ingredients.
    • Reduce heat to low and allow to simmer for 45 minutes to 1 hour, stirring occasionally.
    • Serve over hot dogs and enjoy.

    Video

    Notes

    • Use lean ground beef for this recipe. Beef with a higher fat content can make the hot dog chili quite oily.
    • Serve with more of your favorite toppings for a loaded dog! Shredded cheese, sliced jalapeno and sour cream take it over the top!

    Nutrition

    Calories: 113kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 35mg | Sodium: 624mg | Potassium: 452mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 630IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 2mg

    This post was originally published on February 18th, 2021. It has been updated with new photos and information.

    Kale and Broccoli Salad with Sweet and Sour Dressing

    May 13, 2026 by Tanya Harris 2 Comments

    kale and broccoli salad on table

    My Kale and Broccoli Salad is made with healthy kale, broccoli, dried cranberries, and walnuts, and is topped with a delicious, sweet-and-sour dressing. It's the perfect green salad, full of amazing flavor.

    kale and broccoli salad on table

    You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

    Salads are my jam! Well, bright and colorful salads are. I’ve shared a few colorful pasta salads here before, like this cold seafood salad, and this Hawaiian macaroni salad.

    But it's been a while since I've shared a salad recipe, so it's time I shared this kale salad with you all. 

    This salad is inspired by the Chick-fil-A superfood salad. Yep, they sell more than that delicious fried chicken and amazing lemonade. 

    This salad is full of my favorite ingredients

    • Kale - one of my favorite leafy greens. Not only is it healthy, but the leaves are also strong and hold up well to dressings in a salad. I love to use it as a base in many of my salads.
    • Dried Cranberries - both sweet and tart at the same time. I can eat these like they’re candy.
    • Broccoli - Adds fresh crunch and color. Who doesn’t love broccoli?
    • Walnuts - They add a nice crunch to the salad
    • Sweet and Sour Dressing - shallot, granulated sugar, apple cider vinegar, salt, dry mustard, celery salt, and vegetable oil.

    How to make Kale and Broccoli Salad

    Step 1

    Prep your ingredients. Cut your kale and broccoli. For this recipe, I like to use fresh kale from a bunch rather than kale in a bag. The kale in the bag is usually roughly chopped and still contains the stalks. I don't mind the stalks when cooking kale, but for salads I'd rather avoid them. I then like to chop my kale into bite-sized pieces. 

    ingredients for kale salad on a table

    Step 2

    Then I place my kale, broccoli, dried cranberries, and walnuts in a large bowl and set them aside.

    I then prepare my dressing by whisking together 1 chopped shallot, apple cider vinegar, sugar, salt, mustard, and celery salt in a large bowl until combined. Then I slowly pour in my vegetable oil while I continue to whisk. 

    vegetables for kale salad in a bowl
    dressing for kale salad being whisked

    Step 3

    Like magic, your dressing will thicken and be ready to pour over your salad.

    I then toss it all together. This salad is best when refrigerated for at least 2 hours before eating, but sometimes I just cannot wait, and I sneak a few bites as soon as I'm done making it. 

    dressing for kale salad
    salad dressing being poured over salad
    kale and broccoli salad that has been tossed

    Variations

    If you’re looking for some added protein, a nice pan-seared chicken breast or leftover roasted chicken would be a great addition to this salad.

    close up photo os kale broccoli salad

    Keep It Fresh: Storage Tips

    Store leftover kale and broccoli salad in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

    Because kale and broccoli are hearty vegetables, this salad holds up well after it’s dressed. Give the salad a quick toss before serving, and add the walnuts right before serving if you want them to stay crunchy.

    If you want to make this salad ahead of time, you can prepare it up to 1 day in advance and keep it refrigerated until ready to serve.

    Tanya's Top Tips

    • Chop the kale and broccoli small so every bite gets a little of everything and the salad is easier to eat.
    • Whisk the dressing slowly as you pour in the oil so it thickens properly.
    • Let the salad chill for at least 2 hours before serving if you can. It gives the kale time to soften a bit and helps the flavors come together.
    • Start with less sugar if you prefer and adjust to taste if you tend to like a less sweet dressing.
    • Massage the kale for a softer texture if you want a more tender salad.
    kale and broccoli salad on fork

    I hope you enjoy this salad as much as we do. Looking for more salad recipes? Try these out:

    Carrot Raisin Salad  - A creamy, sweet, and crunchy classic salad that’s perfect for holidays, cookouts, or an easy make-ahead side.

    Creamy Rotisserie Chicken Salad - This easy chicken salad is creamy, flavorful, and perfect for sandwiches, crackers, or a quick lunch.

    Shrimp and Bacon Spinach Salad Recipe - A fresh and hearty spinach salad loaded with shrimp, crispy bacon, and bold flavor.

    Cranberry Pecan Apple Salad Recipe - A crisp and colorful salad with sweet apples, tart cranberries, and crunchy pecans in every bite.

    or top this salad with my Homemade Air Fryer Croutons. 

    kale and broccoli salad on table
    Print Recipe
    4.34 from 3 votes

    Kale and Broccoli Salad Recipe

    This kale and broccoli salad is full of delicious and healthy ingredients and tossed in a yummy sweet and sour dressing. 
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    rest time2 hours hrs
    Total Time2 hours hrs 10 minutes mins
    Course: Salad
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: kale and broccoli salad
    Servings: 8 people
    Calories: 468kcal
    Author: Tanya Harris

    Ingredients

    For the Salad

    • 4 cups kale chopped
    • 3 cups broccoli florets chopped
    • 1 cup dried cranberries
    • 1 cup walnuts chopped

    Sweet and Sour Dressing

    • 1 shallot chopped
    • ⅔ cup granulated sugar
    • ⅓ cup apple cider vinegar
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ¾ teaspoon dry mustard
    • ¼ teaspoon celery salt
    • 1 cup vegetable oil

    Instructions

    Assemble the Salad

    • Combine kale, broccoli, dried cranberries, and walnuts in a large bowl. Set aside. 

    Prepare the Sweet and Sour Dressing

    • In a medium bowl, whisk together shallot, granulated sugar, apple cider vinegar, salt, dry mustard, and celery salt until combined. Slowly pour in vegetable oil while whisking until mixture thickens. 
    • Pour salad dressing over kale mixture and toss, making sure the salad is fully covered. 
    • Cover and refrigerate for 2 hours for best flavor. 

    Notes

    • Storage: Store leftover salad in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. For the best texture, add the walnuts just before serving so they stay crunchy.
    • Make Ahead: This salad can be made up to 1 day in advance and kept refrigerated until ready to serve.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 468kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 37g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 23g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 382mg | Potassium: 236mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 1265IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 1mg

    This recipe was originally published January 17th, 2019. It has been updated with new photos and information.

    Pan Seared Lamb Chops

    May 12, 2026 by Tanya Harris 2 Comments

    Lamb chops in skillet with rosemary and garlic.


    Pan-seared lamb chops bring restaurant‑quality flavor to a simple weeknight dinner at home. Seared in a hot skillet and finished with garlic rosemary butter, these chops cook quickly while staying juicy and tender.

    Lamb chops in skillet with rosemary and garlic.

    You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

    I cook a lot of meat in my cast-iron skillet, and lamb chops are right up there with the best things you can throw in a hot pan. They are small, they cook fast, and they have so much flavor.

    I treat them a lot like I treat a good steak. 

    For seasoning, I keep it simple. Salt, pepper, and a little cumin. I prefer to sear in a cast-iron skillet, but any heavy skillet that can get nice and hot will work.

    If you don't have a skillet handy, my Air Fryer Lamb Chops give you a hands-off way to get delicious chops.

    Pan-Seared Lamb Chops at a Glance

    • Prep Time: 20 minutes
    • Cook Time: 10 minutes
    • Total Time: 30 minutes
    • Serves: 4
    • Best For: Weeknight dinners, date night


    A Quick Look at The Ingredients

    Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    • Lamb rib chops: Rib chops are the smaller, leaner cut that comes from the rack of lamb. They have that long bone sticking out, which is why people sometimes call them lamb lollipops. You can also use loin chops if that is what you have, but the cooking time may be a wee bit longer, about 1-2 minutes.
    • Kosher salt: I use Diamond Crystal kosher salt. If you are using table salt or a finer salt, use a little less.
    • Black pepper: I use pre-ground black pepper. Fresh ground black pepper works too.
    • Ground cumin: This is my little twist. A small amount goes a long way, giving the chops a warm, savory flavor.
    • Neutral oil: Canola, avocado, olive oil for cooking, or grapeseed all work. You want a high-smoke-point oil for that hard sear.
    • Unsalted butter: For basting at the end.
    • Garlic: Two cloves, smashed with the side of a knife. You don't need to mince it. Smashed cloves perfume the butter without burning as fast.
    • Fresh rosemary: Fresh rosemary holds up to the heat and infuses the butter.
    Ingredients for pan-seared lamb chops


    How to Make Pan-Seared Lamb Chops

    Step 1: Pull the lamb chops out of the fridge and pat them very dry with paper towels. I let them sit for about 20 minutes to knock the chill off.

    Step 2: Mix the salt, pepper, and cumin in a small bowl. Sprinkle the mixture evenly over both sides and the edges of the chops, pressing it in so it sticks. Let the chops sit at room temperature while you heat the pan.

    Seasonings mixed in smalll bowl.
    Lamb chops that have been seasoned with salt, black pepper, and cumin.

    Step 3: Set a large cast-iron skillet over low heat and let it warm up for about 7 minutes. Then bump the heat to medium-high for another 3 minutes. You want the pan very hot. If you aren't using cast iron, you won't have to heat it for this long. Just bring the heat to medium-high. 

    Step 4: Add the oil and swirl to coat. Lay the chops in a single layer, making sure they don't touch. Let them sear for 3 to 4 minutes on one side. Then, flip the chops and sear the other side for 2 to 4 minutes. For medium rare, cook to an internal temp of 125 to 130°F; for medium, 135°F. An instant-read thermometer helps determine the inner temperature.

    Lamb chops cooking in skillet.

    Step 5: Use tongs to stand the chops up on their fatty edge for about 10 to 20 seconds, just long enough to render some of the fat and crisp the sides. 

    Step 6:  Drop the heat to medium-low. Add the butter, smashed garlic, and rosemary sprigs to the pan. As the butter melts and starts to foam, use a kitchen towel or oven mitt to tilt the pan toward you, then ladle the butter over the chops.

    Step 7: Transfer the chops to a plate. Spoon a little of the pan juices over the top and let them rest for 5 minutes before serving. 

    Lamb chops and skillet with rosemary and garlic, and spoon with butter sauce on it

    Cast Iron vs Stainless Steel

    I like cast iron for this recipe because it holds heat well and gives the deepest sear. Stainless steel works too and heats more quickly. A nonstick skillet will work, but you’ll get less crust.

    Serving Suggestions

    Lamb chops are rich, so I like to pair them with sides that have some brightness or starch to balance the plate.

    • Garlic Mashed Potatoes soak up all that rosemary butter from the pan and are the classic pairing for a reason.
    • Air Fryer Asparagus gives you a quick green side that hits the table alongside the chops.
    • Honey-Roasted Carrots add a touch of sweetness that pairs well with the cumin and rosemary.

    Tanya's Top Tips

    • Use a thermometer. Lamb chops are small, and the window between perfect and overcooked is tight. An instant-read thermometer takes the guessing out. Pull at 125 to 130°F for medium rare, 135°F for medium. The temp will rise a few degrees as it rests.
    • Don't crowd the pan. If the chops are packed in, the pan loses heat, and you end up with a gray, sad sear. Cook in two batches if needed.
    • Let the pan get hot. The 7 minutes on low, followed by 3 minutes on medium-high, is what evenly heats cast iron all the way through and gives better control over the heat. Heating a cast iron to medium-high heat too fast can result in burnt meat.
    Cut lamb chops on a plate with rice and vegetables.

    Related Recipes

    I hope you love these pan-seared lamb chops as much as we do. If you're looking for more lamb recipes or other ways to cook meat in a skillet, try these out:

    • The Best Air Fryer Lamb Chops: If you want a hands-off method, the air fryer does a great job with lamb chops, too.
    • Pan-Seared Steak: Same cast-iron method, bigger cut. Once you nail one, you can nail the other.
    • Roasted Boneless Leg of Lamb: For when you're feeding a crowd or going big for the holidays.
    • Braised Lamb Recipe: A low and slow option that gives you fall apart tender meat.
    • Lamb Meatballs with Herb Yogurt Sauce: Another way to use lamb that comes together quickly on a weeknight.
    Lamb chops in skillet with rosemary and garlic.
    Print Recipe
    5 from 1 vote

    Pan Seared Lamb Chops

    These pan seared lamb chops are quick, easy, and packed with flavor. Seared in a hot cast iron skillet and finished with garlic rosemary butter, they're a restaurant quality dinner you can make at home in 30 minutes.
    Prep Time20 minutes mins
    Cook Time10 minutes mins
    Total Time30 minutes mins
    Course: entree
    Cuisine: American
    Keyword: pan seared lamb chops
    Servings: 4 people
    Calories: 356kcal
    Author: Tanya Harris

    Equipment

    • 1 cast iron skillet

    Ingredients

    • 5 to 6 lamb rib chops about 1 ¼ pounds total
    • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
    • 2 tablespoons neutral oil canola, avocado, olive for cooking, or grapeseed
    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • 2 garlic cloves lightly smashed, skins removed
    • 3 fresh rosemary sprigs

    Instructions

    • Remove lamb from the fridge and pat very dry with paper towels.
    • In a small bowl, mix the salt, black pepper, and cumin. Sprinkle evenly over both sides and edges of the chops, pressing so the seasoning sticks. Let the chops sit at room temperature while you preheat the skillet.
    • Place a large cast iron or heavy stainless steel skillet over low heat and warm it for about 7 minutes. Increase the heat to medium high and heat for 3 minutes more, until the skillet is very hot. A drop of water should sizzle on contact.
    • Add the neutral oil to the hot skillet and swirl to coat the bottom in a thin, even layer. Add the chops in a single layer and sear without moving for 3 to 4 minutes, until well browned and a crust forms.
    • Flip and sear the other side for 2 to 4 minutes, or until the internal temperature is about 125 to 130°F for medium rare, around 135°F for medium.
    • Use tongs to stand the chops up on their fatty edge for 10 to 20 seconds to render and crisp the fat cap. Lean them against each other in the pan to hold them upright.
    • Reduce heat to medium low. Add the butter, garlic, and rosemary to the pan. As the butter melts and foams, tilt the pan and spoon the butter over the chops for 30 to 90 seconds, until fragrant.
    • Transfer chops to a plate. Spoon a little of the pan juices over the top and let rest 5 minutes before serving.

    Video

    Notes

    • For best results, use an instant-read thermometer. Pull the lamb at about 125 to 130°F for medium rare or 135°F for medium. Temperature will rise a few degrees as it rests.
    • Store leftover lamb chops in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
    • This recipe is written for a cast iron or heavy stainless steel skillet. If using stainless steel, preheat over medium heat for 2 to 4 minutes, until the oil is shimmering, before adding the chops. A nonstick skillet will work, but you may not get as deep a sear.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 356kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 28g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 108mg | Sodium: 975mg | Potassium: 395mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.03g | Vitamin A: 202IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 28mg | Iron: 3mg

    Southern Potato Salad Recipe

    May 6, 2026 by Tanya Harris 19 Comments

    Potato salad in a white bowl on a wood table.

    Creamy, tangy, and so delicious, this Southern potato salad is a must-have side dish. Simple and easy to make, it's perfect for BBQs and cookouts.

    Potato salad in a white bowl on a wood table.

    You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

    Tanya holding a bowl of potato salad in the kitchen.

    Living in the South, I've tried all kinds of potato salad...but this potato salad belongs on your table. Whether it's a large gathering or you need it for a side dish for a fried chicken dinner, this recipe right here is what you need.

    Made with dill relish, mustard, honey, mayo, and crunchy vegetables, this Southern potato salad is creamy, sweet, and tangy with a great texture.

    Simple and quick to make, every bite is truly delicious! If you're a fan of potato salads, try my dill potato salad too.

    Best, Tanya

    A Quick look at the ingredients

    Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

    • The salad: Potatoes, boiled eggs, onion, bell pepper, and celery — make the salad hearty, creamy, and full of crunch
    • For the dressing: Mayonnaise, yellow mustard, dill relish, and honey — make the dressing creamy, tangy, and slightly sweet
    • For finishing: Salt, pepper, and paprika — add seasoning and color
      Ingredients for southern potato salad on countertop with labels

      How to make Southern potato salad

      Step 1: Place potatoes in a large pot and cover potatoes with cold water by about 2 inches. Bring to a boil and boil until tender, about 10 minutes.

      Strain the potatoes and set aside to cool.

      Boiling the potatoes.
      The cooked potatoes being drained.

      Step 2: Mix the mayonnaise, yellow mustard, dill relish, and honey in a large bowl until combined.

      The ingredients for the mayonnaise dressing mixed together in a white bowl

      Step 3: Add remaining ingredients (including the cooled potatoes).

      The ingredients added to the mayonnaise.

      Step 4: Stir until combined. Cover and refrigerate for at least 1 hour or overnight.

      Add salt and pepper to taste and garnish with paprika. Serve and enjoy.

      The potato salad mixed together in a white bowl.

      What are the best potatoes to use?

      This potato salad is best made with starchy, floury potatoes. Yukon gold and red potatoes are best to use; russet potatoes can be used as well. Avoid waxy potatoes, such as fingerlings and salad potatoes, for this.

      Can you make it ahead of time?

      This is a great make-ahead dish, so it's ideal for cookouts. Once you have made it, cover it and refrigerate it. It will keep well for up to 5 days. Don't leave the potato salad at room temperature for more than two hours.

      What do you serve it with?

      This Southern potato salad pairs well with meat, chicken, seafood, and veggie mains. It's an excellent addition to anything grilled and is perfect for cookouts, picnics, and potlucks. Try it with:

      • BBQ Air Fryer Ribs or Oven Baked Beef Ribs
      • Marinated Salmon
      • Jamaican Jerk Chicken
      • Turkey Burgers
      Close up of the potato salad garnished with paprika.

      Tanya's Notes and Tips

      • Cut the potatoes into small, even chunks so they cook through quickly and evenly.
      • Let the potatoes cool before mixing them with the mayonnaise. If they are hot, the mayonnaise can split, causing a very oily salad.
      • Let your Southern potato salad sit for at least an hour in the fridge before serving for the best flavor.

      More Southern Side Dishes

      • Southern Candied Sweet Potatoes
      • Vinegar Coleslaw
      • Yellow Rice
      • Air Fryer Asparagus
      • Southern Style Macaroni Salad
      southern potato salad in bowl topped with paprika
      Print Recipe
      4.89 from 9 votes

      Southern Potato Salad Recipe

      Creamy, tangy and so delicious, this Southern potato salad is a must have side dish. Simple and easy to make, it's perfect for BBQs and cookouts.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time10 minutes mins
      Total Time20 minutes mins
      Course: Side Dish
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: creamy potato salad, potato salad with mayonnaise, potato salad with relish
      Servings: 6 to 8 servings
      Calories: 360kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 2 lbs Yukon Gold Potatoes about 4 potatoes, peeled and chopped into 1 inch chunks
      • ¾ cup of mayonnaise
      • 2 Tablespoon of yellow mustard
      • 2 Tablespoon dill relish
      • 2 teaspoon honey
      • ½ a sweet onion diced (about ½ cup)
      • ½ a red bell pepper diced (about ½ cup)
      • 1 celery stalk diced (about ½ cup)
      • 2 boiled eggs chopped
      • Salt and pepper to taste
      • Paprika to sprinkle on top for garnish optional

      Instructions

      • Place potatoes in a large pot and cover potatoes with cold water by about 2 inch. Bring to boil and boil until tender, about 10 minutes. Strain the potatoes and set aside to cool.
      • Mix the mayonnaise, yellow mustard, dill relish, and honey in a large bowl until combined. Add remaining ingredients (including the cooled potatoes) and stir until combined. Cover and refrigerate for at least 1 hour or overnight.
      • Add salt and pepper to taste and garnish with paprika. Serve and enjoy.

      Video

      Notes

      • Cut the potatoes into small and even chunks so that they cook through quickly and evenly.
      • Let the potatoes cool before mixing them with the mayonnaise. If they are hot, the mayonnaise can split causing a very oily salad.
      • Let your Southern potato salad sit for at least an hour before serving for the best flavor.
      • Yukon gold, red potatoes are best to use with this dish however russet potatoes can be used as well.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 360kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 74mg | Sodium: 327mg | Potassium: 731mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 434IU | Vitamin C: 44mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 2mg

      This post was originally published on March 24th, 2021. It has been updated with new photos and additional information.

      Quick and Easy Mongolian Beef

      May 6, 2026 by Tanya Harris 17 Comments

      Mongolian beef in a bowl over some rice.

      If you are looking to mix up your weekly meals, this easy Mongolian beef is perfect! This rich and flavorful dish is on the table in 20 minutes, and the whole family will love it.

      Mongolian beef in a bowl over some rice.

      This post contains affiliate links, please read my full disclaimer here.

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      Evenings in our house are so busy, and I'm always trying new recipes that I can get on the table quickly and easily, and that everyone will love! This Mongolian beef is a lifesaver! It's so full of flavor!

      Inspired by my love of the Mongolian beef at my favorite Chinese restaurant, this recipe has all the components I love.

      • Lots of onions - I use both yellow and green onions in this recipe. The yellow onions provide a nice contrast in texture with the tender beef.
      • Fried yet tender beef - This recipe calls for the beef to be quickly fried, so you get crispy, tender beef in one bite.
      • An amazing sauce - This sauce is balanced with sweet and salty.

      Serve this delicious beef dish with white rice, cauliflower rice, noodles, my Instant Pot brown rice, or my air-fried egg rolls.

      Ingredients You Will Need


      To make this quick and easy Mongolian beef recipe, you’ll need a few simple ingredients that come together to create a flavorful homemade takeout-style dinner.

      Flank steak is the best cut of beef for Mongolian beef because it cooks quickly and stays tender when sliced thin against the grain. Cornstarch helps coat the beef for that classic, lightly crispy texture.


      For the bold Mongolian beef sauce, you’ll need low-sodium soy sauce, hoisin sauce, brown sugar, and water to achieve the perfect balance of sweet and savory. Yellow onion, green onions, garlic, and fresh ginger add texture and deep flavor to the dish, while canola oil is used to quickly fry the beef.

      Add a little salt to taste before serving, and this easy beef dinner is ready in no time.

      ingredients needed for the mongolian beef on table

      How to Make This Quick and Easy Mongolian Beef Recipe

      Step 1: Slice the flank steak against the grain into thin slices, then coat the slices with cornstarch. Set aside.

      flank steak sliced and then covered in cornstarch

      Step 2: Grab the rest of your ingredients and prep and measure them out so they are ready to go.

      Ingredients prepped to make the dish

      Step 3: Heat the canola oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Once hot, add the flank steak to the frying pan in a single layer. Cook on 1-2 minutes per side until each side is browned. Cook in batches and set aside.

      The skirt steak cooked in a skillet in oil - before and after

      Step 4: Add the yellow onion, whites of green onions, garlic, and ginger to the skillet and stir-fry until the onions are slightly softened. Add soy sauce, water, hoisin sauce, and brown sugar, stirring.

      Step 5: Add the steak back to the pan along with the green parts of the onions. Remove from heat and serve.

      Onions and garlic sauteed and then the beef and sauces adedd

      What's the best cut of beef to use?

      I like to use flank steak for this recipe. If you can't find flank steak, skirt steak, or hanger steak will also work. Flank steak is full-flavored and a lean cut of meat. It can be tough, but by thinly slicing it correctly and quickly cooking it, it is wonderfully tender.

      Close up of the cooked Mongolian beef

      How to cut flank steak

      Before you start, freeze the beef for 30 minutes; this will make it easier to slice thinly. Be sure to cut the beef against the grain so you cut through the fibers, making it as tender as possible and easier to eat.

      A piece of Mongolian beef held with chopsticks

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • Freeze your steak before slicing it. It will make it easier and less likely to fall apart. Remember to cut against the grain.
      • Prep all of your ingredients before you start cooking. The dish comes together so quickly, so have everything to hand and ready to go.
      • If you have leftovers, they will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for 4 days. They can be reheated on the stovetop or in the microwave.
      • The Mongolian beef will also freeze really well. Thaw it in the fridge overnight before reheating.

      More Beef Recipes

      • Korean Flavored Sloppy Joes - a flavorful twist on beef sloppy joes.
      • Steak Kimchi Fried Rice - fried rice with kimchi and steak.
      mongolian beef in plate
      Print Recipe
      4.93 from 13 votes

      Easy Mongolian Beef

      Easy Mongolian beef is a rich and flavorful dish and is on the table in 20 minutes. Your favorite takeout made at home. Can also be made in the air fryer.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time10 minutes mins
      Total Time20 minutes mins
      Course: Main Course
      Cuisine: Mongolian
      Keyword: air fryer Mongolian beef, easy mongolian beef, quick Mongolian beef
      Servings: 4 servings
      Calories: 303kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 1 lb flank steak thinly sliced against the grain
      • 2 Tablespoon cornstarch
      • 2-4 Tablespoon canola oil
      • 1 yellow onion sliced
      • 2 green onions chopped, green and white parts separated
      • 4 garlic cloves chopped
      • 1- inch ginger chopped
      • ¼ cup low sodium soy sauce
      • ¼ cup water
      • 1 Tablespoon hoisin sauce
      • 3 Tablespoon brown sugar
      • Salt to taste

      Instructions

      • Cover the flank steak with cornstarch, making sure each piece is covered. Set aside.
      • Heat the canola oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Once the oil is hot, add the flank steak to the frying pan in a single layer, making sure that the pieces are not touching. Cook on 1-2 minutes per side until each side is browned. Cook in batches until all the flank steak is cooked. Set aside.
      • Add sliced yellow onion, whites of green onions, garlic, and ginger to the skillet and stir fry for about 3 minutes, until the onions are slightly softened but still have a little crunch. Add soy sauce, water, hoisin sauce, and brown sugar and stir. Add steak back to the pan along with the green parts of the onions. Remove from heat and serve.

      Air fryer Instructions:

      • This Mongolian Beef can also be made in an Air Fryer. If Air Frying, coat the flank steak in corn starch and place in a preheated air fryer of 400 degrees Fahrenheit. Cook for 15 minutes, shaking the basket halfway. Prepare the sauce on the stove with the onion, garlic, ginger, soy sauce, water, hoisin sauce, and brown sugar.
      • After multiple tests, we preferred the stovetop version but wanted to share the Air Fryer version for anyone wanting to exclude the frying component of this recipe.

      Notes

      • Freeze your steak before slicing it. It will make it easier and less likely to fall apart. Remember to cut against the grain.
      • Prep all of your ingredients before you start cooking. The dish comes together so quickly, so have everything to hand and ready to go.
      • If you have leftovers, they will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for 4 days. They can be reheated on the stove top or in the microwave.
      • The Mongolian beef will also freeze really well. Thaw it in the fridge overnight before reheating.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 303kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 68mg | Sodium: 670mg | Potassium: 496mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 60IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 2mg

      This post was first published on March 6, 2020. It has been updated with new photos and information.

      Fried Pork Chops (Crispy Southern Style)

      April 29, 2026 by Tanya Harris 2 Comments

      Two crispy fried pork chops served on a dark plate with fresh green beans and cherry tomatoes.

      When I'm craving crispy, perfectly golden fried pork chops, this is how I make them.

      Two crispy fried pork chops served on a dark plate with fresh green beans and cherry tomatoes.

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      Fried Pork Chops At A Glance

      • What I'm Sharing: The technique and recipe for perfectly fried and delicious golden pork chops.
      • Prep Time: 15 minutes
      • Cook Time: 8 minutes
      • Total Time: 23 minutes
      • Serves: 4
      • Best For: Sunday dinner, weeknight comfort, and anyone who appreciates a perfectly golden-brown crust.
      Tanya holding a plate of fried pork chops

      I’ve always been a huge fan of pork chops, but a perfectly fried pork chop is the ultimate winner. Frying pork chops is a true skill because you want a crust that stays crispy while the meat remains juicy.

      I’ve spent plenty of time not just eating fried pork chops, but studying exactly how to fry them right. Now, whenever a craving hits, this is my go-to method.

      If you love pork chops as much as I do, you’ll also want to try my Juicy Pan-Seared Pork Chops or my Air Fryer Pork Chops.

      Happy cooking,

      Tanya

      A Quick Look at the Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      For the Pork Chops

      • Pork chops, about ½ inch thick - Thinner chops fry faster and stay tender. Bone-in or boneless both work, just keep the thickness consistent so they cook evenly. I use center-cut pork loin chops and trim any excess fat from the exterior.
      • Mustard - It helps the seasoning and flour grip the meat, and the flavor cooks off, so you won't taste mustard in the finished chop. I used Dijon, but yellow mustard works as well.
      • Dry Seasoning - I use All-Purpose Seasoning, but any well-balanced blend works. You can also use my Pork Chop Seasoning or Seasoned Salt.

      For the Coating

      • Eggs - Two large eggs, beaten, help build that double layer of crust.
      • All-purpose flour and cornstarch - The cornstarch is what gives you that extra crisp crust. Mix it with all-purpose flour for the best results.

      For Frying

      • Neutral oil. Vegetable, canola, or peanut oil all work - You want about ½ inch of oil in the skillet, enough to come halfway up the chops.

      How to Make Fried Pork Chops

      The method is simple, but the details matter. Follow each step and don't rush the oil temperature.

      Step 1: Pat the pork chops completely dry with paper towels. Rub them all over with yellow mustard and season both sides with 1 teaspoon of all-purpose seasoning.

      Patting raw pork chops dry with a paper towel to ensure a crispy crust
      pork chops covered in mustard

      Step 2: In a shallow bowl, whisk together the flour, cornstarch, and the remaining 2 teaspoons of all-purpose seasoning. In a second bowl, beat the egg until smooth.

      Step 3: Dredge each chop in the flour mixture, dip it into the egg, let the excess drip off, and then return it to the flour and coat evenly. Press the flour gently into the chop and shake off any excess.

      Battering station for pork chops with flour and egg wash.

      Step 4: Place the coated chops on a plate and let them sit for 10 minutes. This rest helps the coating set so it doesn't slide off in the oil.

      Step 5: Add oil to a large cast-iron skillet so it comes halfway up the sides of the chops, about ¼ inch deep. Heat it gradually over medium heat. The oil is ready when a pinch of flour dropped in sizzles steadily, or when it reaches 350°F.

      Step 6: Fry the chops for 3 to 4 minutes per side, until deep golden brown. Flip once. Don't crowd the pan; work in batches if needed, and adjust the heat to keep a steady sizzle.

      Lifting a crispy fried pork chop from a cast iron skillet with tongs.

      Step 7: Transfer to a wire rack and let rest for a few minutes before serving. The rack keeps the bottom crust from going soggy.

      Four crispy fried pork chops on a wire cooling rack.

      Serve and enjoy. Season with additional salt and pepper if desired.

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • Start with center-cut pork chops and trim off any excess fat cap. The fat curls up while the chop fries and lifts the breading right off, plus it renders into the oil and changes how everything cooks.
      • Use a cast-iron skillet. It holds heat steady and gives you the most even browning.
      • Get the oil hot enough before the chop hits it. Cold oil is what causes the breading to soak up grease rather than crisp. Bring it up gradually so it heats through evenly, then test with a pinch of flour. If it sizzles steadily, you're good.
      • Stick to 2 to 4 chops in one batch of oil. Any more than that and the oil starts getting dirty, and your later chops won't fry as cleanly as the first ones.
      • Don't crowd the pan. Adding too many chops at once drops the oil temperature fast, and that's when you get a greasy crust. Two chops at a time are plenty for a 10-inch skillet.
      • Rest the coated chops for 10 minutes before frying and rest the cooked chops on a wire rack instead of a paper towel. The rack lets steam escape so the crust stays crispy on all sides.

      Recommended Tools

      1. Lodge Cast Iron Skillet
        Lodge Cast Iron Skillet
        Buy Now
      2. Long Tweezer Tongs Professional Gold
        Long Tweezer Tongs Professional Gold
        Buy Now
      3. FryAway Cooking Oil Solidifier
        FryAway Cooking Oil Solidifier
        Buy Now

      What to Serve with these Fried Pork Chops

      These pork chops make a great dinner or breakfast option. I like to serve them with creamy mashed potatoes, a flavored rice like this garlic butter rice, and steamed vegetables. For breakfast, they're great with some creamy grits, or if you're using boneless chops, consider making a fried pork chop sandwich.

      I hope you love these fried pork chops as much as we do. If you're looking for more crispy, comforting recipes, try these out:

      Smothered Pork Chops - Tender pork chops in a rich onion gravy.

      Juicy Pan-Seared Pork Chops- A quick stovetop chop for busy weeknights.

      Two crispy fried pork chops served on a dark plate with fresh green beans and cherry tomatoes.
      Print Recipe
      No ratings yet

      Fried Pork Chops Recipe

      Crispy, golden fried pork chops with a juicy center. Dijon mustard helps the seasoned flour coating grip the meat for a crust that stays crunchy.
      Prep Time15 minutes mins
      Cook Time8 minutes mins
      Total Time23 minutes mins
      Course: Main Course
      Cuisine: American, Southern
      Keyword: fried pork chops
      Servings: 4 people
      Calories: 875kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Equipment

      • cast iron skillet

      Ingredients

      • 4 pork chops about ½ inch thick (center cut, fat cap trimmed)
      • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
      • 1 tablespoon all-purpose seasoning divided
      • 1 cup all-purpose flour
      • 2 tablespoons cornstarch
      • 2 large eggs
      • 1 cup oil for frying about ¼ inch in pan

      Instructions

      • Pat pork chops dry and trim any excess fat cap. Rub all over with Dijon mustard and season both sides with 1 teaspoon of all-purpose seasoning.
      • In a shallow bowl, combine the flour, cornstarch, and remaining 2 teaspoons of all-purpose seasoning. In a second bowl, beat 2 large eggs until smooth.
      • Coat each chop in the flour mixture, dip into the egg letting the excess drip off, then return to the flour and coat evenly. Press lightly and shake off excess.
      • Place coated chops on a plate and let sit for 10 minutes.
      • Add about 1 cup of oil to a 10-inch cast iron skillet, enough to come up about ¼ inch. Heat over medium heat, bringing it up to temperature gradually. The oil is ready when a pinch of flour sizzles steadily or it hits about 350°F.
      • Fry pork chops for 3 to 4 minutes per side, until golden brown. Flip once and don't overcrowd the pan. Adjust heat as needed to maintain a steady sizzle.
      • Transfer to a clean wire rack and rest a few minutes before serving.

      Notes

      • Resting the coated chops for 10 minutes is what helps the breading stay on during frying.
      • Use a wire rack instead of paper towels for resting cooked chops so the bottom crust stays crisp.
      • For thicker chops, add 1 to 2 minutes per side.
      • Pork chops are safely cooked when the internal temperature reaches 145°F. For best results, use a quick-read thermometer to check the internal temperature.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 875kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 35g | Fat: 68g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 18g | Monounsaturated Fat: 40g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 172mg | Sodium: 139mg | Potassium: 616mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 190IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 88mg | Iron: 4mg

      How to Store Fried Pork Chops

      Storage: Store leftover pork chops in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. The crust will soften some, but the flavor holds up well.

      Freezing: Freeze cooked, cooled chops in a single layer, then transfer to a freezer bag. They keep for up to 2 months.

      Reheating: For the crispiest results, reheat in a 375°F oven or air fryer for 5 to 7 minutes. Skip the microwave if you can; it makes the crust go limp.

      Strawberry Baked Oatmeal

      April 27, 2026 by Tanya Harris 6 Comments

      Strawberry baked oatmeal in a casserole dish

      I love making Strawberry Baked Oatmeal for breakfast. It is easy to make ahead, keeps well in the fridge, and makes busy mornings so much easier.

      Strawberry baked oatmeal in a casserole dish

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      One of my favorite breakfast meals growing up was those little packets of dry strawberries-and-cream oatmeal. I loved those things more than the real oatmeal Grandma would make on the stove. It was probably because of all the sugar in each packet. Yay sugar! It probably wasn't that good for me. I probably didn't care.

      Now, I care lol, and I find baking the oatmeal ahead of time results in oatmeal you can make for a crowd, or prep ahead for breakfast. This recipe is great because it involves fresh fruit and ingredients you likely already have in the kitchen.

      This baked oatmeal is easy to adjust for everyone in the house. Just add a little milk for a softer, creamier bowl or enjoy it as is for a heartier texture. It is a simple, delicious breakfast that works for different tastes with very little effort.

      A Quick Look at The Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Oats: Old-fashioned rolled oats make up the base of this baked oatmeal and give it the best texture. I would skip quick-cooking oats, as they can make the baked oatmeal too soft.
      • Fruit: Fresh strawberries add a sweet, juicy flavor in every bite.
      • Sweeteners and spices: Brown sugar and granulated sugar add the perfect amount of sweetness, while cinnamon and nutmeg bring in that cozy strawberries-and-cream flavor.
      • Baking staples: Baking powder helps the oatmeal bake up nicely.
      • Liquids: Milk and eggs help create the custardy texture that holds everything together. I use dairy milk here, but another milk you like should work just fine.
      • Flavor boosters: Melted butter, vanilla, and a little salt round out everything and add richness, depth, and balance.
      ingredients for strawberry baked oatmeal on table

      How to Make Strawberry and Cream Baked Oatmeal

      Step 1: Prepare the baking dish: Lightly grease a 7x13 casserole dish with butter or nonstick cooking spray. An 8x8 baking dish can also be used, but the oatmeal will be a little thicker.

      Step 2: Mix the dry ingredients. In a medium bowl, stir together the oats, brown sugar, cinnamon, nutmeg, baking powder, and salt.


      Step 3: Whisk the wet ingredients. In a separate bowl, whisk together the milk, eggs, melted butter, and vanilla. Stir in the granulated sugar until combined.

      dry oatmeal mixture with a spoon in it.
      Milk and eggs mixed in a bowl with a whisk in it

      Step 4: Combine everything. Pour the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients, then stir until everything is well combined. Fold in the chopped strawberries.

      Step 5: Add to the baking dish. Pour the oatmeal mixture into a prepared baking dish and spread it into an even layer.

      Wet ingredients of strawberry baked oatmeal and casserole dish before baking

      Step 6: Bake and serve. Bake in the preheated oven for 20-25 minutes, or until the oatmeal is set and lightly golden on top. Let it cool slightly before serving.

      Strawberry baked oatmeal and baking dish with spoon sticking out

      Looking for more breakfast recipes? Try these out:

      • Million Dollar Bacon
      • Pumpkin Pie Oatmeal (Pressure Cooker Recipe)
      • Egg Bites (Pressure Cooker Recipe)
      Strawberry baked oatmeal in a casserole dish
      Print Recipe
      No ratings yet

      Strawberry Baked Oatmeal Recipe

      Strawberry and Cream Oatmeal is delicious and the perfect make-ahead breakfast meal. Perfect for weekdays and weekends. Healthy, fruity, and creamy oatmeal is the perfect breakfast. 
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time25 minutes mins
      Total Time35 minutes mins
      Course: Breakfast
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: strawberry cream oatmeal
      Servings: 6 people
      Calories: 293kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 2 cups old fashioned rolled oats
      • ⅓ cup light brown sugar
      • ¼ cup white granulated sugar
      • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
      • ¼ teaspoon nutmeg
      • 1 teaspoon baking powder
      • ¼ teaspoon salt
      • 2 cups milk
      • 2 large eggs
      • 1.5 Tablespoons butter melted
      • ¼ teaspoon vanilla
      • 1.5 cups chopped strawberries about 10 medium sized strawberries

      Instructions

      • Preheat the oven to 375F and lightly grease a 7x13 casserole dish with butter or nonstick cooking spray.
      • In a medium bowl, combine the oats, brown sugar, granulated sugar, cinnamon, nutmeg, baking powder, and salt.
      • In a separate bowl, whisk together the milk, eggs, melted butter, and vanilla.
      • Pour the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients and stir until combined. Fold in the chopped strawberries.
      • Pour the oatmeal mixture into the prepared baking dish and spread it into an even layer.
      • Bake for 20 to 25 minutes, or until the oatmeal is set and lightly golden on top.
      • Let cool for a few minutes, then serve warm.

      Notes

      • I used a 7x13, but an 8x8 baking dish can also be used; the oatmeal will be a little thicker and may need a few extra minutes to bake.
      • For a softer, creamier bowl, add a splash of milk when serving.
      • Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat individual portions in the microwave before serving.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 293kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 79mg | Sodium: 180mg | Potassium: 385mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 315IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 173mg | Iron: 2mg

      How to Store Strawberry and Cream Baked Oatmeal

      Let the baked oatmeal cool completely, then cover the dish or transfer leftovers to an airtight container. Store it in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. When you are ready to eat, reheat individual portions in the microwave and add a splash of milk if you want a softer, creamier texture.

      You can also freeze baked oatmeal for longer storage. Wrap individual portions tightly or place them in freezer-safe containers and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before reheating.

      Strawberry baked oatmeal in a bowl with a spoon sticking out

      Variations

      This baked oatmeal recipe is easy to make your own with a few simple swaps.

      • Swap the fruit: Try blueberries, raspberries, chopped apples, or peaches instead of strawberries.
      • Change the milk: Dairy milk works great, but almond milk, oat milk, or another favorite milk can be used.
      • Add texture: Stir in chopped pecans, walnuts, or sliced almonds for a little crunch.
      • Make it extra cozy: Add a little more cinnamon or a pinch of cardamom for a warmer flavor.
      • Add a topping: Serve it with a drizzle of maple syrup, a spoonful of yogurt, or an extra splash of milk.

      Tanya’s Top Tips

      • Watch the bake time if using an 8x8 dish, since the oatmeal may need a few extra minutes to cook through.
      • Use old-fashioned rolled oats for the best texture. Quick oats can make the baked oatmeal too soft.
      • Do not skip greasing the dish, or the oatmeal will not lift out easily after baking.
      • Use ripe, sweet strawberries for the best flavor.
      • Let it cool for a few minutes before serving so it has time to set.
      • Add milk when serving if you like your oatmeal a little softer and creamier.

      This recipe was first published on April 11, 2016. It has been updated with additional information and photos.

      Easy Garlic Butter Rice

      April 22, 2026 by Tanya Harris 4 Comments

      garlic butter rice with butter, head of garlic in background

      This garlic butter rice is the perfect way to add flavor to plain rice.

      garlic butter rice in bowl wtith spoon sticking out

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      Tanya holding a bowl of garlic butter rice

      Rice is one of those things I keep on heavy rotation in my kitchen. Whether it's plain white rice or a flavored version like my yellow rice or cilantro lime rice.

      This garlic rice comes out perfect with my stovetop method. I like to sweat the garlic in butter before adding the rice, resulting in a mellow, sweet garlic flavor running through every grain rather than a sharp, raw garlic bite. We love this rice.

      I think you'll love this one too.

      Love, Tanya

      Garlic Butter Rice At A Glance

      • Prep Time: 5 minutes
      • Cook Time: 23 minutes
      • Rest Time: 5 minutes
      • Total Time: 33 minutes
      • Serves: 4 as a side
      • Best For: Weeknight dinners, family meals, holiday side dish

      A Quick Look at The Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Long grain white rice: It cooks up fluffy and separate. Jasmine rice is a great swap if that's what you have, just check the package for the liquid ratio. You could also use brown rice, but you’ll need to increase the cook time and may need to adjust the liquid based on the package directions.
      • Unsalted butter: I use unsalted so I can control the salt myself. Feel free to use salted butter if that's your preference.
      • Fresh garlic: I use fresh garlic and mince it for this recipe.
      • Low-sodium chicken broth: gives you the most control over the final seasoning. Vegetable broth works if you want to keep this meatless.
      • Salt: A small amount goes in with the garlic to season it from the start, then more goes in with the broth.
      • Parsley: Fresh parsley to garnish.
      ingredients for garlic butter rice on table


      How to Make Garlic Butter Rice

      Step 1: In a medium saucepan over medium-low heat, melt the butter until it's fully liquid and just starting to foam. You don't want it browning, just melted and ready.

      Step 2: Add the minced garlic and a small pinch of salt. Let the garlic cook gently for about 5 minutes, stirring occasionally. You're looking for soft, fragrant garlic, not browned.

      Step 3: Add the rice straight into the garlic butter and stir for about 10 seconds.

      garlic sweating in butter in pot
      rice being cooked in garlic and butter

      Step 4: Pour in the chicken broth and add the salt. Stir, then turn the heat up to medium-high and bring it to a boil.

      Step 5: Once boiling, reduce the heat to low, cover with a tight-fitting lid, and simmer for 18 minutes. Don't lift the lid. The rice needs the trapped steam to cook properly.

      broth being poured into sauce pan along with the rice
      chicken broth boiling in pot

      Step 6: Take the pot off the heat and let it sit, still covered, for 5 more minutes. This rest time is what gets you fluffy, separate grains.

      Step 7: Fluff with a fork, top with chopped fresh parsley, and serve.

      cooked garlic butter rice after being fluffed with fork

      Variations

      • Vegetarian: Use vegetable broth instead of chicken broth.
      • Cheesy garlic butter rice: Stir in 2 to 3 tablespoons of grated parmesan after fluffing for a richer, cheesier side.
      • Spicy version: Add a pinch of red pepper flakes when the garlic is cooking.

      Serving Suggestions

      Garlic butter rice pairs well with just about any protein. A few of my favorites:

      • Serve it with pan-seared pork chops, lamb chops, or juicy broiled chicken breast for an easy weeknight plate.
      • Pair it with oven-baked shrimp or marinated air fryer salmon when you want something quick.
      • Spoon a saucy main like brown stew chicken or smothered chicken right over the top.
      garlic butter rice with butter, head of garlic in background

      Make Ahead and Storage

      Storage: Let the rice cool, then store it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

      Freezing: Spread the cooled rice in a single layer on a sheet pan to freeze, then transfer to a freezer bag. It keeps for 2 months.

      Reheating: Add a splash of broth or water, then microwave or heat in a covered pan over low heat. The extra liquid keeps it from drying out.

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • Don't rush the garlic infusion. This is the most important step. Low and slow on the garlic is what gives this rice its flavor.
      • Keep the lid on while it simmers. Lifting the lid lets the steam escape, leaving your rice unevenly cooked.
      • Rinse the rice. I always rinse my rice, but you can skip it if you prefer, especially if your rice instructions say not to.

      I hope you love this recipe as much as we do. If you make this recipe, please leave a star rating and let me know how it turned out in the comments below.

      garlic butter rice with butter, head of garlic in background
      Print Recipe
      5 from 2 votes

      Garlic Butter Rice Recipe

      Buttery, fragrant garlic butter rice is an easy one-pot side dish made with long grain white rice simmered in slow-infused garlic butter and chicken broth. 
      Prep Time5 minutes mins
      Cook Time23 minutes mins
      Resting Time5 minutes mins
      Total Time33 minutes mins
      Course: Side Dish
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: garlic butter rice
      Servings: 4 people
      Calories: 239kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 1 cup long grain white rice
      • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
      • 3 cloves garlic minced (about 1 tablespoon)
      • 1¾ cups low sodium chicken broth
      • ½ teaspoon salt plus a pinch for the garlic
      • 2 teaspoons fresh parsley chopped for garnish

      Instructions

      • In a medium saucepan over medium-low heat, melt the butter until it’s fully liquid and just starting to foam.
      • Add the minced garlic and a pinch of salt. Cook on low for 5 minutes, stirring occasionally, until the garlic is soft and fragrant but not browned.
      • Add the rice to the pan and stir for about 10 seconds, coating every grain in the garlic butter.
      • Pour in the chicken broth and add the ½ teaspoon salt. Stir, then increase the heat to medium-high and bring to a boil.
      • Once boiling, reduce heat to low, cover with a tight-fitting lid, and simmer for 18 minutes, until the liquid is fully absorbed.
      • Remove from heat and let the rice rest, still covered, for 5 minutes.
      • Fluff the rice with a fork, top with fresh parsley, and serve warm.

      Notes

      • If you rinse your rice first, make sure to drain it well before adding it to the garlic butter so excess water doesn’t throw off the liquid ratio.
      • Keep the heat low while cooking the garlic. You want it soft and fragrant, not browned, so the rice gets a mellow garlic flavor instead of a bitter taste.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 239kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 325mg | Potassium: 153mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 179IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 23mg | Iron: 1mg

      New Orleans BBQ Shrimp Recipe

      April 20, 2026 by Tanya Harris 4 Comments

      New Orleans-style BBQ shrimp in a skillet with a spoon and bread surrounding it

      This New Orleans BBQ shrimp is a must-make if you want to impress your friends with a shrimp dish. It's not actually barbequed; it's jumbo shrimp that are simmered in a bold, buttery Cajun sauce.

      New Orleans-style BBQ shrimp in a skillet with a spoon and bread surrounding it

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      Tanya holding a bowl of BBQ shrimp and looking at the camera smiling

      BBQ shrimp is not your typical barbecue. Tender shrimp coated in a savory, buttery broth loaded with garlic, Worcestershire sauce, and Cajun seasoning. None of that sticky-sweet stuff.

      You’ll find it on menus all over New Orleans, and every time I have it, it comes with French bread to dip straight into that broth while you eat. It's the best!

      If you love Louisiana flavors, you'll also want to try my Cajun Jambalaya or Southern Style Shrimp and Grits.

      Love, Tanya

      New Orleans BBQ Shrimp at a Glance

      • Best For: Weeknight dinners, date night
      • Prep Time: 10 minutes
      • Cook Time: 12 minutes
      • Total Time: About 22 minutes
      • Serves: 4


      A Quick Look at the Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Jumbo shrimp (peeled and deveined, tail-on recommended) – Tail-on shrimp look great for presentation and hold up well in the sauce. Use the largest shrimp you can find. Raw shrimp, not pre-cooked shrimp, is best for this dish. If it's frozen, thaw it first.
      • Unsalted butter – Use real butter here, not margarine. I use 1 stick of butter in my recipe, but some recipes use much, much more. Feel free to add more butter if you like.
      • Garlic – Freshly minced if you can.
      • Worcestershire sauce – Adds depth and that signature savory note that makes New Orleans BBQ shrimp what it is.
      • Fresh lemon juice – Brightens the sauce and balances the richness of the butter.
      • Cajun or Creole seasoning – My Homemade Cajun Seasoning works well in this dish, but any store-bought blend will work. Salt content varies by brand, so season to taste.
      • Dried rosemary and oregano – Adds a herby note that is very traditional in this dish.
      • Chicken broth – adds a little more body and savory flavor, and plenty of sauce for dipping.
      • Green onions – Sliced, for garnish.


      How to Make New Orleans BBQ Shrimp

      Step 1: Build the sauce base. Melt the butter in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the minced garlic and cook for about 1 minute until fragrant. Do not let it brown.

      Step 2: Season and simmer. Stir in the Worcestershire sauce, lemon juice, Cajun seasoning, rosemary, and oregano. Pour in the chicken broth and let the sauce simmer for 2 minutes, stirring occasionally, until it reduces slightly. Taste and season with salt and pepper.

      Garlic and butter melting in skillet
      Sauce for barbecue shrimp and skillet

      Step 3: Cook the shrimp. Add the shrimp to the skillet in a single layer. Cook for 2 to 3 minutes per side until pink and opaque. As soon as they curl into a C-shape, they are done. Do not overcook them.

      Shrimp cooking in skillet and sauce for barbecue shrimp.
      Bbq shrimp in a skillet on the stovetop.

      Step 4: Serve immediately. Remove the skillet from the heat, garnish with sliced green onions, and spoon into shallow bowls with plenty of that sauce. Serve with crusty French bread right away.

      close up photo of BBQ shrimp in skillet

      Variations

      • Add beer. Some New Orleans recipes call for a splash of beer in the sauce. Add about ¼ cup of a light lager when you add the broth for a slightly deeper flavor.
      • Keep the tails on. The traditional version is made with shell-on, head-on shrimp. If you can find shrimp with the heads on, use them. The heads add a lot of flavor to the sauce, and yes, you eat them the messy way.
      • Add heat. This dish is not traditionally spicy, but if you want a kick, add a few dashes of hot sauce to the sauce while it simmers.
      • Swap the broth. If you have shrimp stock on hand, use it in place of the chicken broth for a more concentrated seafood flavor. I have a Shrimp Stock recipe if you want to make your own.

      Serving Suggestions

      This dish is made to be served in shallow bowls with crusty French bread for dipping. That sauce is the whole point, and you want something to soak it all up.

      You can also serve it over creamy grits, like my Southern Style Shrimp and Grits, spooning the shrimp and sauce over a bowl of creamy grits. It works beautifully as an appetizer for a larger group as well. For a full Southern spread, pair it with my Instant Pot Cajun Dirty Rice.

      Orleans-style BBQ shrimp in a bowl surrounded by bread

      Make Ahead and Storage

      Storage: Store leftover shrimp in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. The sauce may solidify as it cools because of the butter. That is normal.

      Reheating: Reheat gently in a skillet over low heat with a splash of broth or water to loosen the sauce. Avoid high heat, or the shrimp will turn rubbery.

      Freezing: I do not recommend freezing this dish. Shrimp can become tough and watery after freezing and thawing, and the butter sauce does not hold up well.

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • Do not overcook the shrimp. They cook fast. Pull them as soon as they turn pink and curl into a C-shape. An overcooked shrimp is rubbery, and there is no coming back from that.
      • Taste your Cajun seasoning before adding salt. Cajun and Creole blends vary a lot in salt content. Season your sauce to taste rather than just dumping in extra salt.

      FAQs

      Why is it called BBQ shrimp?

      The name comes from the deep, reddish-brown color the butter and Worcestershire sauce take on as it simmers. It looks like barbecue.
      The dish was invented in 1953 at Pascal's Manale, an Italian-Creole restaurant in Uptown New Orleans that's still open today. Mr. B's Bistro and Emeril later put their own spin on it, but Pascal's is where it started.

      I hope you love this New Orleans BBQ Shrimp as much as we do. If you're looking for more shrimp and seafood recipes, try these out:

      • Crispy Air Fryer Fried Shrimp – Crunchy, golden, and so easy in the air fryer.
      • Creamy Shrimp Bisque – A rich, velvety soup perfect for cold nights.
      • Air Fryer Shrimp Po'Boy Sandwiches – New Orleans vibes in sandwich form.
      New Orleans-style BBQ shrimp in a skillet with a spoon and bread surrounding it
      Print Recipe
      5 from 2 votes

      New Orleans BBQ Shrimp Recipe

      Tender jumbo shrimp simmered in a rich, garlicky Worcestershire butter sauce. One skillet, 25 minutes, and a lot of crusty bread required.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time12 minutes mins
      Total Time22 minutes mins
      Course: Appetizer, Main Course
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: New Orleans BBQ Shrimp
      Servings: 4 people
      Calories: 294kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 1 lb jumbo shrimp peeled and deveined (tail-on recommended)
      • 8 tablespoons unsalted butter
      • 4 garlic cloves minced
      • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
      • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
      • 1 tablespoon Cajun or Creole seasoning
      • ½ teaspoon dried rosemary crushed
      • ½ teaspoon dried oregano
      • ½ cup chicken broth
      • Salt and pepper to taste
      • 1 tablespoon green onions sliced (garnish)

      Instructions

      • Melt butter in a large skillet over medium heat. Add garlic and cook for 1 minute until fragrant.
      • Stir in lemon juice, Worcestershire sauce, Cajun seasoning, rosemary, and oregano. Stir in broth and simmer for 2 minutes until slightly reduced. Taste and season with salt and pepper.
      • Add shrimp in a single layer. Cook 2 to 3 minutes per side until pink, opaque, and curled into a C-shape.
      • Remove from heat. Garnish with green onions and serve immediately in shallow bowls with crusty French bread.

      Notes

      Cajun and Creole blends vary in salt. Taste the sauce before adding extra salt.
      Do not overcook the shrimp. They are done as soon as they curl and turn opaque.
      Serve immediately with French bread to soak up the sauce.
      To reheat leftovers, warm gently in a skillet over low heat with a splash of broth.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 294kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 204mg | Sodium: 817mg | Potassium: 204mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 929IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 86mg | Iron: 1mg

      Homemade Fruit Punch Recipe

      April 17, 2026 by Tanya Harris 6 Comments


      Making delicious fruit punch means you need the right fruit juice combo, and this is the one that my whole family loves.

      fruit punch in glass on table outside

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      Tanya Harris holding a glass of fruit punch

      Anytime I need a non-alcoholic, fruity drink, this fruit punch is what I make. It's some of my favorite fruit juices, all combined into one.

      The real stamp of approval came from my youngest. She has never been a fan of store-bought fruit punch, so I wasn’t expecting much. She took one sip and told me it was the best fruit punch she’d ever had. That was it for me.

      If you love a refreshing non-alcoholic drink for a crowd, you might also enjoy my Green Sherbet Punch or my Slow Cooker Hot Holiday Punch.

      Fruit Punch at a Glance

      • Prep Time: 5 minutes
      • Chill Time: 1 hour
      • Total Time: 1 hour 5 minutes
      • Serves: 6 to 8
      • Best For: Parties, gatherings, make-ahead drinks

      A Quick Look at the Ingredients

      • Frozen lemonade concentrate – Thawed. This is the backbone of the punch and gives it that tart, citrusy punch (no pun intended). You could also use limeade concentrate in its place.
      • Cranberry juice, orange juice, and pineapple juice – This is my tart, acidic, and sweet juice combo. Feel free to pick other juices you may prefer, but these are the trio I love. 
      • Ginger ale or club soda – Stirred in right before serving for a little fizz. You can use one or the other, or a mix of both. Club soda keeps it less sweet; ginger ale adds a subtle spiced flavor.
      • Water – I add a little bit of water to lighten the juice up. I say taste your punch before you add it. 

      How to make Fruit Punch

      Step 1: In a large pitcher, combine the thawed lemonade concentrate, cranberry juice, orange juice, pineapple juice, and water. Stir well to combine.

      orange juice being poured into fruit punch

      Step 2: Refrigerate the punch until chilled, at least 1 hour. You can also drink it as soon as it's made, but it's best when chilled.

      Step 3: Just before serving, stir in the ginger ale or club soda.

      Step 4: Serve over ice. Garnish with orange slices or fresh pineapple chunks if you’d like.

      glasses of fruit punch in front of pitcher of fruit punch

      Variations

      Make it alcoholic: Add white rum or vodka to the punch before chilling. Start with 1 to 1.5 cups and adjust to taste. My Jamaican Rum Punch is a great reference if you want a rum-forward version.

      Less tart: Stir in more water or increase the amount of pineapple juice, which is the sweetest juice in the mix.

      Make Ahead and Storage

      Storage: Store the punch in a covered pitcher or airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. The punch won't be as fizzy, but it'll still be delicious.

      Tanya’s Top Tips

      • Don’t add the ginger ale or club soda until right before serving, or you’ll lose all the carbonation. However, if you've made a batch and want to store it, it'll still taste fine; it just won't be as carbonated.
      • For a party, double or triple the recipe and mix directly in a large bowl or punch bowl.

      glass of fruit punch on table

      I hope you love this fruit punch recipe as much as we do. If you’re looking for more drink recipes, try these out:

      • Green Sherbet Punch – A fun, colorful punch that’s perfect for parties.
      • Slow Cooker Hot Holiday Punch – A warm, spiced punch for the colder months.
      • Homemade Cranberry Lemonade – Tart, refreshing, and made from scratch.
      • Classic Lemonade – A simple, crowd-pleasing classic.
      • Jamaican Sorrel Drink – A vibrant, floral drink made with dried sorrel.
      fruit punch in glass on table outside
      Print Recipe
      5 from 2 votes

      Homemade Fruit Punch Recipe

      This homemade fruit punch is refreshing and easy to make with juices you likely already have in your fridge.
      Prep Time5 minutes mins
      Chill Time1 hour hr
      Total Time1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
      Course: Drinks
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: fruit punch, fruit punch recipe
      Servings: 8 people
      Calories: 76kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 12 oz can frozen lemonade concentrate thawed
      • 2 cups cranberry juice
      • 1½ cups orange juice
      • 1 cup pineapple juice
      • 1 cup water
      • 1 cup ginger ale or club soda or a mix of both
      • Ice for serving
      • Orange slices and fresh pineapple chunks for garnish (optional)

      Instructions

      • In a large pitcher, combine the thawed lemonade concentrate, cranberry juice, orange juice, and pineapple juice. Stir well.
      • Refrigerate until chilled, at least 1 hour.
      • Just before serving, stir in the ginger ale or club soda.
      • Serve over ice. Garnish with fruit if desired.

      Video

      Notes

      • This punch is best when stored for up to 3 days.
      • You can use 100% cranberry juice for a less sweet, more tart punch, or cranberry juice cocktail if you prefer a sweeter drink.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 76kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.02g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.04g | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 180mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 123IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 0.4mg

      Broccoli Rice Casserole (Made From Scratch)

      April 15, 2026 by Tanya Harris 5 Comments

      broccoli rice casserole in dish with spoon in it

      I like to make my broccoli rice casserole from scratch, starting with a rich, cheesy, flavorful sauce that comes together in one pot.

      broccoli rice casserole in dish with spoon in it

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      Broccoli Rice Casserole At a Glance

      Creamy, cheesy broccoli and rice casserole made completely from scratch, no canned soup.

      Prep Time: 15–20 minutes
      Cook Time: 30–35 minutes
      Total Time: 45–55 minutes
      Serves: 6–8
      Best For: Holiday dinners, potlucks, family meals

      tanya holding a plate of broccoli rice casserole

      When it comes to comfort food, you can't beat a rice casserole. Hearty and warming, and I love that it's a one-pot meal to cut down on the clean-up time!

      I like to make my cheese sauce from scratch, and mushrooms! Use it in place of a can of cream of mushroom soup you find in most recipes.

      If you are in the mood for more comfort food, be sure to check out my Creamy baked mac and cheese or my sweet potato casserole.

      Love, Tanya

      A Quick Look at the Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Broccoli - I use fresh broccoli florets for this recipe. Frozen broccoli florets work as well; just make sure to defrost them first and pat them dry to remove any excess water.
      • Butter - Used to sauté the onions and mushrooms and build flavor for the sauce.
      • Onions and Mushrooms - The aromatics in this casserole. I use yellow onions and baby bella (cremini) mushrooms.
      • For my sauce - A simple homemade sauce made with all-purpose flour, chicken broth, and evaporated milk instead of canned soup.
      • Seasonings - Mustard powder, salt, black pepper, and garlic powder give the sauce plenty of flavor and keep it from tasting bland.
      • Cheddar cheese and cooked rice - Freshly grated shredded cheddar cheese melts into the sauce and on top of the casserole, and cooked rice makes this a hearty, filling dish.
      ingredients for broccoli rice casserole on counter

      How to make Broccoli Rice Casserole

      Step 1: Preheat your oven to 400°F. Blanch the broccoli: Bring 4 quarts of salted water to a boil. Add the broccoli and cook for about 4 minutes. Remove the broccoli from the water and set aside.

      Step 2: Melt the butter in a large ovenproof skillet over medium heat. Add the onions and mushrooms and sauté for about 5 minutes.

      Sprinkle the flour over the onions and mushrooms, then stir. Cook for about 2 minutes.

      onions and mushrooms in a skillet with flour sprinkled over and stirred

      Step 3: Slowly stir in the chicken broth, making sure to scrape up all the browned bits from the bottom of the skillet. Then slowly whisk in the evaporated milk, mustard powder, salt, black pepper, and garlic powder. Bring the mixture to a simmer and cook for about 5 minutes, until thickened, stirring often.

      cream if mushroom sauce in skillet
      thickened creamy mushroom sauce and skillet on spoon

      Step 4: Remove skillet from heat and slowly stir in 2 cups of the grated cheese until the cheese has melted and the mixture is smooth and creamy. Then stir in the broccoli and rice.

      cheese being mixed into cream sauce
      broccoli and rice and sauce in skillet

      Step 5: Sprinkle the remaining cheese over the mixture. Place in the preheated oven and bake for 15 minutes, until the cheese on top has melted. Remove and enjoy 🙂

      rice, broccoli, chese added to cream sauce in skillet
      baked broccoli and cheese casserole right out of oven

      Can you make a rice casserole ahead of time?

      Yes! This is a great make-ahead dish. You can prep it all the day before and keep it covered in the fridge until you are ready to bake it. Any leftovers can be kept for three to four days and reheated in the oven.

      Can you freeze it?

      This casserole freezes really well, and you can cook it right from frozen. Let it cool, then transfer it to freezer-safe containers; it will keep well for up to 3 months.

      Place the frozen mixture into a casserole dish and bake at 400F for 30 minutes. Give it a good stir and cook for an additional 30 to 40 minutes.

      What's the best rice to use?

      I like to use a long-grain white rice like basmati or jasmine. You can use brown rice if you prefer, just make sure it's fully cooked before adding it to the casserole.

      spoon holding broccoli rice casserole

      Tanyas Top Tips

      • If subbing frozen broccoli for fresh, make sure to defrost the broccoli and drain it before adding it to the casserole. 
      • You can use a casserole dish if you don’t have an ovenproof skillet. Just transfer the cheese mixture to a bowl, add broccoli and cheese, and transfer the mixture to a 2qt casserole dish.
      • For the best melt and flavor, use freshly grated cheddar cheese instead of pre-shredded. Pre-shredded cheese is often coated with anti-caking agents that keep it from melting as smoothly into the sauce.
      • Make it a full meal by stirring in about 2 cups of bite-sized chicken (such as rotisserie, poached, or leftover roast chicken) along with the rice and broccoli before baking.

      I hope you love this broccoli rice casserole recipe as much as we do! For more rice recipes, check these out:

      • Homemade Rice a Roni - A cozy, from-scratch version of the classic boxed rice and pasta side, packed with flavor and pantry staples.
      • Kale Rice - Fluffy rice tossed with tender kale for an easy, veggie-loaded side dish that goes with just about any main.
      • Oven Baked Rice - Perfectly fluffy, hands-off rice baked in the oven so you can set it and forget it while you prep the rest of dinner.
      • Dirty Rice - A bold and savory Cajun-style rice dish made with aromatics and meat for a hearty, one-pan side or main.
      broccoli rice casserole in dish with spoon in it
      Print Recipe
      5 from 1 vote

      Broccoli Rice Casserole

      This from scratch broccoli rice casserole is pure comfort food, creamy and cheesy and packed with broccoli and rice for a satisfying one pot dinner.
      Prep Time15 minutes mins
      Cook Time30 minutes mins
      Total Time45 minutes mins
      Course: Main Course
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: broccoli and rice casserole, how to make broccoli rice casserole from scratch
      Servings: 8 servings
      Calories: 362kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 4 cups fresh broccoli florets chopped
      • 3 Tablespoon unsalted butter
      • ¾ cup chopped onion
      • 2 cups chopped portobello mushrooms
      • 3 Tablespoon all-purpose flour
      • ½ cup chicken broth
      • 1 12 oz can evaporated milk
      • 1 teaspoon mustard powder
      • 1 teaspoon salt or to taste
      • ½ teaspoon black pepper or to taste
      • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
      • 3 cups shredded cheddar cheese separated
      • 2 cups cooked rice

      Instructions

      • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
      • Blanch broccoli - bring 4 quarts of salted water to a boil. Once boiling, place broccoli in the water and boil for about 4 minutes. Remove broccoli from water and set aside.
      • Melt butter over medium heat in a large ovenproof skillet. Add onions and mushrooms and sauté for about 5 minutes.
      • Sprinkle flour over the onions and mushrooms and stir. Cook for about 2 minutes.
      • Slowly stir in the chicken broth, making sure to get up all the brown bits in the bottom of the skillet. Slowly stir in the evaporated milk, mustard powder, salt, black pepper, and garlic powder. Bring mixture to a simmer and allow to simmer for about 5 minutes, stirring often.
      • Remove skillet from heat and slowly whisk in 2 cups of the grated cheese, until the cheese has melted and the mixture is smooth and creamy. Stir in the broccoli and rice. Sprinkle the remaining cheese over the mixture.
      • Place in the preheated oven and bake for 15 minutes, until the cheese on top has melted. Remove and enjoy 🙂

      Notes

      • If subbing frozen broccoli for fresh, make sure to defrost the broccoli and drain it before adding it to the casserole.
      • You can use a casserole dish if you don’t have an ovenproof skillet. Just transfer cheese mixture to a bowl, add broccoli and cheese, and transfer mixture to a 2qt casserole dish.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 362kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Cholesterol: 69mg | Sodium: 675mg | Potassium: 451mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 951IU | Vitamin C: 44mg | Calcium: 456mg | Iron: 1mg

      This post was originally published on August 7th, 2020. It has been updated with new photos.

      Peruvian Green Sauce (Aji Verde)

      April 14, 2026 by Tanya Harris 7 Comments

      peruvian green sauce in bowl

      This Peruvian green sauce, also known as aji verde, is the kind of condiment you'll want to put on absolutely everything.

      peruvian green sauce in bowl
      Tanya holding chicken and green sauce

      This Peruvian green sauce, also known as aji verde, is the kind of condiment you'll want to put on absolutely everything.

      I first fell in love with it at a local Peruvian restaurant my coworkers and I used to frequent for lunch. Fun fact: when I went to Peru, I couldn't find it there. The aji verde you know from Peruvian restaurants in the US is actually a stateside creation. The traditional version uses aji amarillo peppers and huacatay (black mint). The jalapeño and cilantro swap happened here.

      It goes on everything. Peruvian chicken, pork chops, fish, steak, rice and beans. I think you'll love it too.

      Love, Tanya

      Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Cilantro — Use mostly leaves, but small stems are fine.
      • Jalapeños — These vary a lot in heat. Start with seeds removed if you're unsure, then adjust next time.
      • Garlic - I use whole cloves and add them to the blender.
      • Olive oil - for the marinade.
      • Cotija cheese — This adds a salty, tangy richness that mayonnaise alone can't replicate. If you can't find cotija, feta, or Parmesan, either one works.
      • Lime juice — Use fresh. Bottled won't give you the same brightness.
      • Duke's mayo — My go-to. Use your favorite.

      How to Make Peruvian Green Sauce

      Add all your ingredients to a blender and blend until smooth. That's it. Seriously.

      ingredients for green sauce in jar
      blended green sauce in jar

      The only real decision you need to make is how spicy you want it.

      Spice level:

      • Spicy: Leave the seeds and membranes in the jalapeños
      • Mild: Remove seeds and membranes before blending
      • Extra mild: Use just one jalapeño
      spoon picking up green sauce

      How long does Green Sauce last?

      In the fridge, it can last for up to one week.

      I hope you enjoy this green sauce as much as we do.

      Suggested Recipes to eat this with?

      • Peruvian Chicken - Juicy chicken that pairs perfectly with a drizzle of this bright green sauce.
      • Air Fryer Whole Chicken (Peruvian Style) - same traditional flavor, made in the air fryer.
      • Yellow rice - perfect for soaking up every drop of this bright, delicious green sauce.
      peruvian green sauce in bowl
      Print Recipe
      5 from 1 vote

      Peruvian Green Sauce (Aji Verde)

      Delicious bright and bold peruvian Green Sauce that is so easy to make and taste amazing. Serve it with chicken, rice and beans, pork, and so much more.
      Prep Time5 minutes mins
      Cook Time0 minutes mins
      Total Time5 minutes mins
      Course: Sauce
      Cuisine: Peruvian
      Keyword: Peruvian Green Sauce
      Servings: 6 people
      Calories: 190kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Equipment

      • Blender

      Ingredients

      • 2 fresh jalapeños
      • 1 cup cilantro roughly chopped
      • ½ cup mayonnaise I use Duke’s
      • 2 Tablespoon cotija cheese
      • 5 cloves garlic peeled
      • 2 Tablespoon olive oil
      • 2 Tablespoon lime juice from fresh limes
      • ¼ teaspoon salt

      Instructions

      • Place ingredients in blender. Blend until smooth.

      Notes

      For spicier sauce, keep seeds and membranes of jalapeños. For a mild sauce, remove seeds and membranes.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 190kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 282mg | Potassium: 49mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 269IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 37mg | Iron: 0.2mg

      This post was originally published on June 8, 2019. It has been updated with new information and photos.

      Peruvian Chicken Recipe (Pollo a la Brasa)

      April 13, 2026 by Tanya Harris 3 Comments

      Peruvian chicken pieces cut up on a plate

      This Peruvian chicken recipe, also known as pollo a la brasa, is marinated in a bold blend of garlic, cumin, soy sauce, and lime, then grilled or oven-roasted until the skin is golden and crispy. Serve it with aji verde sauce for the full experience.

      Peruvian chicken pieces cut up on a plate

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      Tanya holding a big plate of Peruvian chicken

      I first had pollo a la brasa, also known as Peruvian chicken, at a Peruvian restaurant in North Carolina, and I’ve been making it ever since.

      After visiting Lima, Peru, and taking a cooking class there, and hunting for the best Peruvian chicken, I came home and decided to recreate it again, this time on the grill. It’s so good! The most important thing is the marinade, which comes together easily. I also like to spatchcock my chicken for this recipe, allowing it to cook more quickly. I've also included instructions for baking this chicken in the oven. I got you covered.

      Love, Tanya

      Peruvian Chicken At a Glance

      • Prep Time: 20 minutes
      • Marinate Time: 2 to 24 hours (overnight recommended)
      • Cook Time: 45 to 60 minutes
      • Total Time: About 1 hour 10 minutes (plus marinating time)
      • Serves: 6
      • Best For: Weekend cooking, dinner parties, meal prep

      A Quick Look at The Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Whole chicken: A 4 to 5-pound whole chicken works best. Spatchcocking it (removing the backbone so it lies flat) gives you crispier skin and more even cooking.
      • Extra virgin olive oil: The fat base of the marinade that helps it cling to the chicken.
      • Lime juice: I like to use fresh lime juice in the marinade.
      • Garlic: Six cloves. I throw them all into the blender, as I'll be blending them anyway.
      • Soy sauce: A signature ingredient in pollo a la brasa. Chinese immigration to Peru in the 19th and 20th centuries brought soy sauce into the local cooking tradition, and it has been part of the dish ever since. It adds a deep, savory backbone to the marinade.
      • Cumin: The dominant spice in this recipe. Use a generous tablespoon.
      • Paprika: Adds color and a mild warmth.
      • Dried oregano: A classic Peruvian herb in roasted chicken dishes.
      • Brown sugar: A small amount helps the skin caramelize beautifully on the grill or under the broiler.
      • Black pepper and kosher salt: Season the marinade and the chicken well.
      Ingredients for Peruvian chicken on the table.

      How to Make Peruvian Chicken

      Step 1: Make the Marinade. Add the olive oil, lime juice, garlic, soy sauce, cumin, paprika, oregano, brown sugar, salt, and pepper to a small blender or food processor, and blend until smooth. I use my stick blender for this. The marinade will be thick and fragrant.

      Stick blender blending marinade for Peruvian chicken.
      Blended marinade for Peruvian chicken.

      Step 2: Spatchcock and Season the Chicken. Pat the chicken completely dry with paper towels. This step matters a lot for skin crispiness. Rub the marinade generously under the skin of the breast and thighs, then coat the entire exterior and underside. Place the chicken in a large zip-top bag or a dish covered tightly with plastic wrap.

      Step 3: Marinate. Refrigerate for at least 2 hours, up to 24 hours. Overnight gives you the deepest flavor.

      Raw chicken marinating in Peruvian marinade

      Step 4: Cook Your Chicken. Choose your method below. Remove the chicken from the fridge about 30 minutes before cooking, so it reaches room temperature.

      Grill Method (Peruvian Chicken on the Grill)

      • Preheat your grill to 375°F (190°C) and set it up for indirect heat.
      • Place the chicken, skin-side up, over indirect heat. Close the lid.
      • Cook for 45 to 60 minutes, maintaining a steady temperature throughout.
      • Check the internal temperature in the thickest part of the thigh. Remove the chicken from the grill once it reaches 175°F (79°C).
      • Transfer to a cutting board and let it rest for 15 minutes before carving.

      Oven Method (Peruvian Chicken in the Oven)

      • Preheat your oven to 425°F (220°C).
      • Set a wire rack over a rimmed baking sheet. Place the chicken skin-side up on the rack.
      • Roast for 45 to 55 minutes.
      • If the skin is not dark enough at the end, switch the oven to broil on high for the last 1 to 2 minutes. Watch it closely.
      • Remove when the internal temperature in the thickest part of the thigh reads 175°F (79°C).
      • Rest for 15 minutes before carving.
      Peruvian chicken on the grill grilling

      Step 5: Rest and Carve. Transfer the cooked chicken to a cutting board and let it rest for at least 15 minutes before cutting. This allows the juices to redistribute and keeps the meat moist. Then cut it into pieces and serve with your preferred sauce.

      Peruvian chicken pieces cut up on plates, surrounded by jalapeno, cilantro, limes, and aji verde sauce.

      For Serving

      Peruvian Green Sauce (Aji Verde): The classic pairing. Creamy, herby, and spicy, it is the sauce this chicken was made for.

      Aji amarillo sauce: If you can find aji amarillo paste at a Latin grocery or online, the yellow sauce made from it is incredible with this chicken. Bright, fruity, and mildly spicy.

      French fries: In Peruvian restaurants, pollo a la brasa almost always comes with fries. My Crispy Oven-Baked Fries or Air Fryer French Fries are both great options. You could also serve it with yellow rice and beans.

      What's up with Peruvian chicken on a plate

      Variations

      • Chicken thighs or quarters: If you prefer dark meat only or want a faster cook, bone-in skin-on chicken thighs or quarters work really well with this marinade. Reduce oven time to about 35 to 40 minutes at 425°F (220°C).
      • Spicier version: Add a tablespoon of aji amarillo paste or aji panca paste to the marinade. Both are worth tracking down at a Latin grocery store or online. They add a fruity, mildly spicy depth that is really distinct.
      • Air fryer version: I have a whole post dedicated to this method. Check out my Air Fryer Whole Chicken (Peruvian Style).
      • Gluten free: Swap the soy sauce for tamari or coconut aminos.

      What to Do With Leftover Peruvian Chicken

      One of my favorite uses is chicken salad. Pull the meat off the bone and use it in my Creamy Rotisserie Chicken Salad Recipe. The seasoned Peruvian chicken adds a whole new flavor dimension to a simple chicken salad. Also great chopped over rice bowls or tossed into a quick soup.

      Make Ahead and Storage

      • Make ahead: You can marinate the chicken up to 24 hours in advance. The longer it marinates, the better the flavor.
      • Storage: Store leftover cooked chicken in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
      • Freezing: Cooked chicken can be frozen for up to 3 months. Let it cool completely, then store it in a freezer-safe bag or container.
      • Reheating: Reheat in a 350°F (175°C) oven for 10 to 15 minutes, or in an air fryer at 350°F (175°C) for 5 to 7 minutes, to restore some crispiness to the skin.
      Roasted Peruvian chicken on a baking sheet

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • Pat the chicken completely dry before rubbing on the marinade. Moisture is the enemy of crispy skin.
      • Use a meat thermometer. Pull the chicken when the thighs reach about 175°F (79°C), and let carryover cooking finish during the 15-minute rest.
      • Get the marinade under the skin, not just on top. Use your fingers to loosen the skin over the breast and thighs, and rub it directly onto the meat.
      • Save the backbone when you spatchcock. It makes excellent chicken stock. When grilling, I throw the backbone on the grill to roast it while the chicken cooks.

      FAQs

      Can I use boneless chicken?

      The bone-in version is strongly recommended here. The bones contribute to flavor during the long cook, and the skin gives you that signature crispy exterior. Boneless chicken also cannot hold up to a long marinade without the texture breaking down.

      Do I have to spatchcock the chicken?

      No, but I recommend it. A whole, unspatchcocked chicken will take longer to cook. Spatchcocking reduces the cook time.

      I hope you love this Peruvian chicken recipe as much as we do. If you are looking for more bold, flavorful chicken dinners, try these:

      • Spatchcocked Garlic Parmesan Chicken: Another great use of the spatchcock technique.
      • Copycat Chipotle Chicken Recipe: If you love a bold, marinated chicken, this one is for you.
      • Classic Roasted Chicken: no-fuss whole chicken with crispy golden skin and juicy, flavorful meat.
      Peruvian chicken pieces cut up on a plate
      Print Recipe
      5 from 1 vote

      Peruvian Chicken Recipe (Pollo a la Brasa)

      This Peruvian chicken recipe is marinated overnight in a bold blend of garlic, cumin, soy sauce, and lime, then grilled or oven-roasted until the skin is deeply golden and crispy. Serve it with aji verde sauce for the full experience.
      Prep Time20 minutes mins
      Cook Time45 minutes mins
      Marinating Time8 hours hrs
      Total Time9 hours hrs 5 minutes mins
      Course: Main Course
      Cuisine: Peruvian
      Keyword: peruvian chicken
      Servings: 6 people
      Calories: 357kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Equipment

      • stick blender

      Ingredients

      • 1 whole chicken 4 to 5 lbs, spatchcocked
      • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
      • 2 tablespoons fresh lime juice
      • 2 tablespoons soy sauce
      • 6 garlic cloves
      • 1 tablespoon cumin
      • 2 teaspoons paprika
      • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
      • 2 teaspoons brown sugar
      • ½ tablespoon kosher salt
      • 1 teaspoon black pepper

      Instructions

      • Add the olive oil, lime juice, garlic, soy sauce, cumin, paprika, oregano, brown sugar, salt, and pepper to a small blender or food processor and blend until smooth. The marinade will be thick and fragrant.
      • Pat the spatchcocked chicken completely dry with paper towels. Rub the marinade under the skin of the breast and thighs, then coat the entire exterior.
      • Place in a zip-top bag or covered dish and refrigerate for at least 2 hours, up to 24 hours.

      Grill Method (Indirect Heat):

      • Remove the chicken from the refrigerator about 30 minutes before cooking so it comes closer to room temperature.
      • Preheat the grill to 375°F (190°C) and set it up for indirect heat.
      • Place the chicken skin-side up over the indirect heat. Close the lid.
      • Cook for 45 to 60 minutes, maintaining a steady temperature throughout.
      • Check the internal temperature in the thickest part of the thigh. Remove the chicken from the grill once it reaches 175°F (79°C).
      • Transfer to a cutting board and let rest for 15 minutes before carving.

      Oven Method:

      • Remove the chicken from the refrigerator about 30 minutes before cooking so it comes closer to room temperature.
      • Preheat the oven to 425°F (220°C). Set a wire rack over a rimmed baking sheet.
      • Place the chicken skin-side up on the rack. Roast for 45 to 55 minutes.
      • If the skin is not dark enough at the end, switch the oven to broil on high for the last 1 to 2 minutes. Watch it closely.
      • Check the internal temperature in the thickest part of the thigh and remove the chicken once it reaches 175°F (79°C).
      • Transfer to a cutting board and let rest for 15 minutes before carving.

      Notes

      • Overnight marinating (12 to 24 hours) gives the deepest flavor.
      • Pat the chicken very dry before applying the marinade, and cook over indirect heat for even browning.
      • Temperature: For this recipe, I like to cook dark meat a bit higher. Use a meat thermometer and remove the chicken when the thighs reach 175°F (79°C).
      • Spice it up: For a spicier version, add 1 tablespoon aji amarillo paste or aji panca paste to the marinade.
      • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 357kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 95mg | Sodium: 1009mg | Potassium: 314mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 529IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg

      Dutch Baby Pancake Recipe

      April 10, 2026 by Tanya Harris 4 Comments

      Dutch baby pancake in skillet with berries and powdered sugar on top

      This Dutch baby pancake recipe is the easiest, most impressive breakfast you will ever make. A simple blended batter of eggs, flour, whole milk, and butter bakes up puffy and golden in a cast-iron skillet with zero flipping required.

      Dutch baby pancake in skillet with berries and powdered sugar on top
      tanya holding a slice of dutch baby pancake

      I've been making this Dutch baby for years, and it still gets a reaction every single time. My daughter especially loves watching it puff up through the oven window. Honestly, so do I.

      What I love most is that there are no chemical leaveners, no baking powder, no baking soda. The rise is entirely due to air incorporated during blending. When that aerated batter hits a screaming hot cast-iron skillet in a 425-degree oven, steam and heat push it into a dramatic, golden, puffed pancake. Oh, how I love baking science!

      If you love easy breakfast recipes that feel a little special, you will also want to check out my Sheet Pan Pancakes, my Banana Oatmeal Pancakes, or my Air Fryer French Toast.

      Love, Tanya

      Dutch Baby Pancake at a Glance

      • Prep Time: 15 minutes
      • Cook Time: 17 to 22 minutes
      • Total Time: About 40 minutes
      • Serves: 4
      • Best For: Weekend breakfast, brunch, special occasions

      A Quick Look at the Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Eggs – You need large eggs at room temperature. Room temperature eggs blend better and give the pancake more lift. Pull them out of the fridge while the oven preheats.
      • All-purpose flour – Standard all-purpose flour works great here. No need to sift.
      • Whole milk – Whole milk gives the batter the richest texture. It also needs to be at room temperature, just like the eggs. You can sub with 2% milk in a pinch.
      • Granulated sugar – Just a small amount for a touch of sweetness. This is not a super-sweet pancake.
      • Vanilla extract – Rounds out the flavor.
      • Salt – A small amount to balance everything out.
      • Unsalted butter – This is what the skillet gets coated with before the batter goes in. It gives the edges that gorgeous golden color and keeps the pancake from sticking.
      • Toppings for serving – Powdered sugar, maple syrup, fresh fruit, preserves, or my Homemade Honey Butter are all great options.

      How to Make a Dutch Baby Pancake

      Step 1: Preheat the oven. Set your oven to 425°F (220°C) and place a 10-inch cast-iron skillet on the middle rack as the oven heats up.

      Step 2: Make the batter. Add the eggs, flour, milk, sugar, vanilla, and salt to a blender (or use a stick blender). Blend for about 45 to 50 seconds until the batter is completely smooth and slightly airy. This is the step that makes the pancake puff.

      Batter for Dutch baby pancake in a glass jar

      Step 3: Melt the butter. Once the oven is preheated, add the butter to the hot skillet and return it to the oven for a couple of minutes until the butter is fully melted. Keep a close eye on it so it does not burn.

      Step 4: Add the batter. Carefully remove the hot skillet from the oven and pour the batter directly into the center of the buttered pan. Immediately return it to the oven.

      cast iron skillet with melted butter
      Better for Dutch baby pancake and skillet

      Step 5: Bake. Bake for 17 to 22 minutes until the edges are puffed and golden brown. Do not open the oven door while it is baking. Opening the door lets out heat and can cause the pancake to collapse before it sets.

      Dutch baby pancake as soon as it came out of the oven

      Step 6: Remove from the oven. Carefully remove the skillet from the oven and place it on a heat-safe surface. The Dutch baby will be very puffy and golden around the edges.

      Step 7: Serve immediately. Cut into wedges and top with your favorites. The pancake will begin to deflate as it cools, so get it to the table fast.

      Close-up photo of Dutch baby pancake from above.

      Variations

      • Sweet Dutch Baby: Keep the recipe as written and top with powdered sugar, fresh berries, and maple syrup.
      • Lemon Dutch Baby: Add a teaspoon of fresh lemon zest to the batter before blending. Serve with a squeeze of lemon juice and a dusting of powdered sugar.
      • Cinnamon Sugar Dutch Baby: Add a quarter teaspoon of cinnamon to the batter. Once out of the oven, immediately sprinkle with cinnamon sugar.
      • Apple Dutch Baby: Top with a bit of sauteed apples. I love these Southern fried apples as a topping. Add them to the middle of the Dutch baby after you remove it from the oven.
      • Savory Dutch Baby: Skip the sugar and vanilla. After baking, top with fresh herbs, sour cream, smoked salmon, or sautéed mushrooms and cheese.

      Serving Suggestions

      This Dutch baby is a meal on its own, but it goes well with a side of crispy bacon or sausage. For toppings, I love it with a dusting of powdered sugar and a drizzle of maple syrup. Fresh strawberries, blueberries, or raspberries are great on top. If you want something extra indulgent, try a dollop of my Homemade Honey Butter or my Cinnamon Butter on top.

      Slice of Dutch baby pancake on a plate.

      Storage

      • Refrigerator: Store leftovers in the fridge, in an airtight container, for up to 3 days. The texture will not be the same as fresh, but it is still good.
      • Reheating: Warm leftovers in a 300°F oven for about 5 to 7 minutes.

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • Use room temperature eggs and milk. This is the most important tip. Cold ingredients will reduce the puff. Pull them out of the fridge while the oven preheats.
      • Let the blender do the work. Blend the batter for a full 45 to 50 seconds. That time in the blender is what incorporates air into the batter and drives the rise in the oven.
      • Do not open the oven door. Watch through the oven window if you want to see the puff happen, but keep that door closed until the timer goes off.
      • Have your toppings ready. The Dutch baby starts deflating as soon as it hits the cooler air of your kitchen. Get it to the table fast.
      • Serve it straight from the skillet. Bring the whole pan to the table and let people serve themselves. It makes the whole experience more fun.
      Dutch baby pancake in skillet with garnishes surrounding it

      FAQs

      Is a Dutch baby the same as a German pancake?

      They are essentially the same thing. The name Dutch baby is said to come from a mispronunciation of Deutsch, the German word for German, at a Seattle cafe in the early 1900s. The names are used interchangeably today.

      Can I make a Dutch baby without a cast-iron skillet?

      Yes. A cast-iron skillet gives the best results because it holds heat so well, but any oven-safe 10-inch pan works. Avoid glass or ceramic baking dishes, as they do not heat evenly. A metal pie dish or a 9x13 baking dish for a doubled batch also works.

      Can I double this recipe?

      Yes! To double the recipe, pour the batter into a 9x13 inch baking dish instead of a skillet. The bake time will be similar, but keep an eye on it.

      Can I make this Dutch baby ahead of time?

      Can I make this Dutch baby ahead of time?
      It’s best right from the oven, but you can blend the batter up to 24 hours ahead and chill it. Let it sit out while the oven preheats, whisk, then bake. Leftovers keep in the fridge for up to 3 days and reheat in a 300°F oven for 5 to 7 minutes.

      I hope you love this Dutch baby pancake as much as we do. If you're looking for more breakfast recipes, try these out:

      • Mini Dutch Baby Pancakes – Individual-sized Dutch babies that are perfect for serving a crowd without any slicing.
      • Sheet Pan Pancakes – All the flavor of pancakes with none of the standing at the stove flipping.
      • Banana Oatmeal Pancakes – A wholesome, hearty pancake that comes together quickly on a weekday morning.
      • Sweet Potato Pancakes – Fluffy, subtly sweet pancakes with a hint of warm spice.
      • Air Fryer French Toast – Thick, golden French toast made easy in the air fryer.
      Dutch baby pancake in skillet with berries and powdered sugar on top
      Print Recipe
      5 from 2 votes

      Dutch Baby Pancake Recipe

      This Dutch baby pancake bakes up puffy and golden in a cast iron skillet using a simple blended batter of eggs, flour, whole milk, and butter. No flipping, no leaveners, and it is ready in about 40 minutes.
      Prep Time15 minutes mins
      Cook Time17 minutes mins
      Total Time32 minutes mins
      Course: Breakfast, entree
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: dutch baby pancake
      Servings: 4 people
      Calories: 237kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Equipment

      • stick blender

      Ingredients

      • 3 large eggs at room temperature
      • ½ cup all-purpose flour about 72 grams
      • ½ cup whole milk at room temperature
      • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar 15 grams
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
      • ⅛ teaspoon salt
      • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter

      Instructions

      • Preheat the oven to 425°F (220°C). Place a 10-inch cast-iron skillet on the middle rack while the oven heats up.
      • Add the eggs, flour, milk, sugar, vanilla, and salt to a blender. Blend for 45 to 50 seconds until completely smooth.
      • Once the oven is preheated, add the butter to the hot skillet and return it to the oven. Watch it closely until the butter is fully melted, about 1 to 2 minutes. Do not let it burn.
      • Carefully remove the skillet from the oven. Pour the batter directly into the center of the buttered skillet. Immediately return it to the oven.
      • Bake for 17 to 22 minutes until the edges are golden brown and puffed. Do not open the oven door during baking.
      • Cut into wedges and serve immediately with your choice of toppings. It will deflate as it cools, so serve it right away.

      Video

      Notes

      • Room temperature eggs and milk are key. Cold ingredients reduce the puff.
      • A cast-iron skillet yields the best results, but any oven-safe 10-inch pan will work. Avoid glass or ceramic.
      • To double the recipe, use a 9x13-inch baking dish.
      • Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat in a 300°F (150°C) oven for 5 to 7 minutes.
      • Top with your favorite toppings such as powdered sugar, berries, or keep it savory with toppings like cheese, mushrooms, and herbs.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 237kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 157mg | Sodium: 133mg | Potassium: 113mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 577IU | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 1mg

      Ghanaian Jollof Rice Recipe

      April 8, 2026 by Tanya Harris 4 Comments

      jollof rice in pot surrounded by tomatoes

      This jollof rice recipe has become a family favorite, and once you taste it, you will understand why. This traditional West African red rice is cooked in a rich, deeply seasoned tomato base that infuses every grain with bold, savory flavor.

      jollof rice in pot surrounded by tomatoes

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      tanya holding jollof rice in kitchen

      I make a lot of rice dishes, so it was only a matter of time before jollof rice made its way into my regular rotation. My husband travels to Ghana frequently, and this recipe is a combination of recipes from the home cooks and a chef he met there.

      Jollof rice has a few steps, and the key is not to rush them. You'll need a blender to break down your tomatoes, onions, and peppers, and you need to cook that mixture down really well before the rice ever touches the pot. Once you get the hang of it, this recipe is not intimidating at all. If you love rice dishes, you might also enjoy my Jamaican Rice and Peas and my One-Pot Jerk Chicken and Rice.

      Jollof Rice At a Glance

      • Prep Time: 10 minutes
      • Cook Time: 50 minutes
      • Total Time: 1 hour
      • Serves: 8
      • Best For: Weeknight dinners, meal prep, holiday gatherings

      What Is Jollof Rice?

      Jollof rice is a one-pot West African dish where rice cooks directly in a seasoned tomato-based stew, so every grain soaks up the flavor. It is a staple across West Africa, with Nigeria, Ghana, and Senegal each claiming its own version. The core is always the same: rice, a deeply cooked tomato base, and plenty of seasoning. This recipe is inspired by Ghanaian jollof, which skips the red bell pepper you may find in other recipes, and lets the tomato, aromatics, and spices do the heavy lifting.

      A Quick Look at the Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Roma tomatoes, scotch bonnet peppers, onion, garlic, and ginger: All of these go into the blender together to form the base. Roma tomatoes work well here because they are meatier and less watery than other varieties. For scotch bonnets, I actually use habaneros most of the time because they're much easier to find at a regular grocery store, and the heat level is similar. I like my jollof on the spicier side, so I usually add 2 peppers. If you want less heat, start with 1. For the seeds and membrane, I remove most of them, but I leave a little membrane in because that is where the heat and flavor really live. Adjust to your comfort level.
      • Parboiled rice: I use it because it holds up better during cooking, gives you more consistent results, and produces separated grains instead of a mushy pot. White long-grain rice also works well.
      • Tomato paste: I prefer regular tomato paste in this recipe, rather than double-concentrated. It gives you just the right amount of rich tomato flavor without overpowering the dish. If using double-concentrated, I suggest reducing the amount by ½.
      • Vegetable oil: Used to cook the tomato base down in the pot.
      • Chicken broth: Adds flavor to the rice as it cooks. Vegetable broth or fish stock also works here.
      • Salt, curry powder, and bay leaves: your seasoning trio. Curry powder adds warm flavors and depth. Some recipes use Maggi cubes for added flavor, but I skip this and opt for a flavorful chicken broth instead.
      ingredients for jollof rice

      How to Make Jollof Rice

      Step 1: Blend the base. Add the Roma tomatoes, habanero or scotch bonnet peppers (with most of the membrane removed), onion, garlic, and ginger to a blender. Blend until completely smooth.

      tomaoes, ginger, onions, etc in blender before blending
      jollof base ingredients in blender after bing blended

      Step 2: Cook the tomato base. Heat the vegetable oil in a large heavy-bottomed pot over medium heat. Pour in the blended mixture and cook, stirring occasionally, for about 15 minutes. You will notice a lot of popping and spattering as the water cooks out. Keep cooking until the mixture has thickened and most of the liquid has evaporated. This step is what builds the deep flavor base, so do not rush it.

      tomato puree in pot before blending
      tomato mixture in pot after cooking down in oil

      Step 3: Add the tomato paste and seasoning. Stir in the tomato paste and cook for about 10 seconds. Then add the salt, curry powder, and bay leaves, stirring to combine.

      Step 4: Add broth and rice. Pour in the chicken broth and stir. Bring to a simmer, then add the rinsed parboiled rice and stir to combine.

      all jollof ingredients in pot before steaming rice

      Step 5: Cook the rice. Reduce the heat to low, cover the pot tightly, and cook for 25 minutes until the rice is tender and the liquid is absorbed. Keep the heat on low here to prevent burning.

      Step 6: Rest and serve. Remove from the heat and let the rice sit, covered, for 10 minutes. Then fluff with a fork. Remove the bay leaves before serving.

      jollof rice before fluffing
      jollof rice after fluffing

      Variations

      • Less spicy: Use 1 habanero or scotch bonnet instead of 2, and remove all seeds and membranes.
      • White long-grain rice: Works well. However, for more consistent results and separated grains, stick with parboiled. 
      • Vegetarian: Swap chicken broth for vegetable broth.
      • Stir in cooked mixed vegetables, such as peas, corn, and chopped carrots.
      • Smoky bottom (party style): Once the rice is fully cooked, turn the heat up to medium-high for 3 to 5 minutes with the lid on. You will hear the rice crackling at the bottom of the pot. This creates a smoky, slightly crispy bottom layer that is a traditional and beloved part of jollof rice in West Africa.
      jollof rice on plate

      Serving Suggestions

      Jollof rice is a full side dish on its own and pairs well with just about any protein. Serve it alongside my Jamaican Jerk Chicken. I've also used this rice as a base in a chicken bowl. So good!

      Storage

      • Refrigerator: Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 4 days.
      • Freezer: Jollof rice freezes well. Store in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight before reheating.
      • Reheating: Add a splash of water or broth and reheat on the stovetop over low heat, covered, until warmed through. You can also microwave it with a damp paper towel over the top to keep the rice from drying out.

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • Cook the tomato base until it is really thick, and most of the liquid has cooked out, before adding anything else. If the stew is still watery when you add the rice, your rice will not cook properly and will come out mushy.
      • If using white long-grain rice, rinse your rice before adding it to the pot. This removes excess starch and helps the grains stay separated. Most parboiled rice instructs not to rinse, but I still like to give all my rice a quick rinse. 
      • Let the rice rest covered for 10 minutes after cooking. This finishes the cooking process and allows the steam to redistribute through the pot.
      • Use a heavy-bottomed pot. A thin pot will distribute heat unevenly, and you are more likely to get a burnt bottom.

      I hope you love this jollof rice as much as we do. If you are looking for more rice recipes, try these out:

      • Jamaican Rice and Peas - A classic Jamaican side dish made with kidney beans and coconut milk.
      • One-Pot Jerk Chicken and Rice - Smoky jerk-seasoned chicken cooked right in the pot with rice.
      • Easy Yellow Rice Recipe - A simple, vibrant yellow rice that works as a side for so many meals.
      • Oven Baked Rice - A hands-off method for perfectly cooked rice every time.
      jollof rice in pot surrounded by tomatoes
      Print Recipe
      5 from 2 votes

      Ghanaian Jollof Rice Recipe

      This jollof rice is a one-pot West African rice dish cooked in a rich, well-seasoned tomato base. Deeply flavorful and perfectly spiced.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time50 minutes mins
      Total Time1 hour hr
      Course: Side Dish
      Cuisine: African
      Keyword: jollof rice, jollof rice recipe
      Servings: 8 people
      Calories: 313kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 5 Roma tomatoes chopped
      • 1 to 2 habanero or scotch bonnet peppers seeds and most of membrane removed
      • 1 medium onion chopped
      • 4 cloves garlic
      • 1- inch piece fresh ginger
      • ½ cup vegetable oil
      • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
      • 1 ½ teaspoons salt or to taste
      • 1 teaspoon curry powder
      • 2 bay leaves
      • 2 cups chicken broth or vegetable broth
      • 2 cups parboiled rice rinsed

      Instructions

      • Add the tomatoes, habanero peppers, onion, garlic, and ginger to a blender. Blend until smooth.
      • Heat the vegetable oil in a large heavy-bottomed pot over medium heat. Pour in the blended mixture and cook, stirring occasionally, for about 15 minutes until thickened and most of the liquid has evaporated. The mixture will pop and spatter as it cooks.
      • Stir in the tomato paste and cook for about 10 seconds. Add the salt, curry powder, and bay leaves, and stir.
      • Pour in the chicken broth and stir to combine. Bring to a simmer.
      • Add the rinsed rice and stir. Reduce the heat to low, cover tightly, and cook for 25 minutes until the rice is tender and the liquid is absorbed.
      • Remove from the heat and let sit, covered, for 10 minutes. Fluff with a fork and serve.

      Notes

      • Keep the heat on low at the end of cooking to prevent the bottom of the rice from burning.
      • The tomato base should be thick and most of the liquid should be cooked out before you add the rice.
      • Habanero peppers are a great substitute for scotch bonnet and are much easier to find at a regular grocery store.
      • For a smoky bottom (party-style jollof), turn the heat up to medium-high for 3 to 5 minutes with the lid on after the rice is fully cooked.
      • Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days, or freeze for up to 3 months.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 313kcal | Carbohydrates: 42g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 691mg | Potassium: 234mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 401IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 28mg | Iron: 1mg

      Homemade Jamaican Jerk Marinade (Bold, Authentic Flavor)

      March 27, 2026 by Tanya Harris Leave a Comment

      The marinade in a jar with a spoon taking some out.

      I make this jerk marinade from scratch every time I want to give my guests an authentic Jamaican experience, and it never disappoints.

      The marinade in a jar with a spoon taking some out.

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      pic of Tanya

      I keep a batch of this jerk marinade on hand because it’s one of my favorite ways to add big, bold flavor to dinner with almost no effort. It’s packed with fresh herbs, warm spices, and those punchy Scotch bonnet peppers that bring that true Jamaican jerk vibe I grew up loving.

      If jerk is your thing too, you’ve got options. Use this marinade with my Jerk chicken, easy Jerk chicken bowls, flavorful whole snapper, or quick-baked Jamaican Jerk shrimp. And when you’re ready to play with even more jerk flavor, check out my homemade jerk BBQ sauce.

      Love, Tanya

      Seasoning meat with the jerk marinade.

      Jamaican Jerk Marinade Recipe Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Onions: I use both yellow onions and green onions (also known as scallions) in this recipe.
      • Scotch bonnet peppers - If you cannot find scotch bonnet peppers, habanero peppers are a perfect substitute. Choose your favorite type of hot pepper to adjust the heat level.
      • Fresh thyme, garlic, ginger - Classic aromatics that give this marinade its signature Jamaican flavor.
      • Soy sauce - Adds salt and umami, and helps the marinade cling to the meat.
      • Canola oil - I use canola oil, but any neutral oil like olive or avocado oil works.
      • Lime juice & white vinegar - Brighten the flavor and help tenderize the meat.
      • Light brown sugar - Balances the heat and adds a little caramelized flavor.
      • Allspice berries - A key jerk ingredient with warm, peppery notes.
      • Ground black pepper & Salt
      • Ground cinnamon & nutmeg - A touch of warm spice that makes jerk taste like jerk.
      • Browning - Browning is optional. I use it to give the jerk marinade a darker color. If you don't have browning, leave it out. The marinade will taste and work the same. Or, make my homemade browning recipe to use in place of store-bought.
      jerk marinade ingredients.

      Tools needed for this recipe

      • Blender
      • Food processor, if a blender isn't available.

      How To Make Your Own Jerk Marinade

      Step 1: Place all ingredients in a blender or food processor. Blend until smooth.

      jerk marinade ingredients in a blender cup.

      Step 2: Use jerk marinade over your favorite proteins and most vegetables before cooking.

      The marinade ingredients all blended up inside the cup.

      How To Store Jerk Marinade

      Store unused marinade (fresh or leftover) in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Refrigerate for up to 7 days.

      Note: Discard any used marinade to avoid cross-contamination with bacteria from raw meat.

      Can I freeze jerk marinade? Yes! Rather than storing in a glass mason jar or like container, I recommend using Souper Cubes. These can store your marinade in measured portions and are easy to remove from the silicone container. Freeze for up to 3 months. Note: This is for unused marinade only.

      How To Use Jerk Marinade

      1. To start, prepare the meat or vegetables you plan on marinating.
      2. Once your marinade is blended, place the meat or vegetables in a shallow dish or a resealable bag, then pour the marinade over them, making sure they are completely covered.
      3. Cover the dish, or tightly seal the plastic bag, and refrigerate for at least 2 hours. Marinate meat overnight for maximum flavor.
      4. When you're ready to cook, discard any remaining marinade from the dish or bag.
      Jerk marinade in a jar with a spoon.

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • It's best to wear gloves when handling spicy peppers like Scotch bonnets or habaneros. This way, you can discard them without worrying about getting any pepper juice on your skin or your eyes.
      • When layering ingredients in the blender or food processor, it's best to place the ingredients with the highest water content closest to the blades. In addition to the liquid ingredients, these ingredients will help to add moisture and bring the jerk marinade together more easily.
      • Use about 3-4 tablespoons of marinade per 1 pound of meat.
      Are jerk marinade and jerk seasoning the same thing?

      While both may contain the same ingredients, they have some distinct differences. A jerk marinade contains meat tenderizers like citrus and vinegar, then oil to emulsify the ingredients, creating a wet marinade. Jerk seasoning is a dry blend of spices and ingredients that does not contain any liquid.

      What types of meats are good for jerk marinade?

      Jerk marinade is great on most types of protein: Chicken, pork, beef, turkey, and seafood.

      Looking for more seasoning recipes? Try these out:

      • Adobo Seasoning Recipe
      • Homemade Blackened Seasoning
      • Homemade Cajun Seasoning
      • Homemade Fish Seasoning

       If you have tried this recipe or any other recipe on my blog, please rate it and let me know how it turned out in the comments below!

      A jar of marinade with a spoon in it.
      Print Recipe
      5 from 3 votes

      Jerk Marinade

      This homemade jerk marinade is made from scratch with fresh ingredients for bold, authentic Jamaican flavor. Use it on chicken, pork, shrimp, and more for a Caribbean experience every time.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Total Time10 minutes mins
      Course: Sauce, Seasoning, spices
      Cuisine: Jamaican
      Keyword: jerk marinade
      Servings: 16 persons
      Calories: 38kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Equipment

      • 1 small blender
      • 1 small souper cubes

      Ingredients

      • 1 Yellow onion chopped
      • 7 Green onions chopped
      • 4 Scotch bonnet peppers you can use habanero peppers as a substitute
      • 4 stalks Fresh thyme
      • 2 cloves Garlic
      • 1 inch Ginger peeled
      • 3 tablespoons Soy sauce
      • 3 tablespoons Canola oil
      • 2 tablespoons Lime juice
      • 2 tablespoons White vinegar
      • 1 tablespoon Brown sugar
      • 1 tablespoon Allspice berries
      • 2 teaspoons Ground black pepper
      • 1 ½ teaspoons Salt
      • ½ teaspoon Ground cinnamon
      • ½ teaspoon Ground nutmeg
      • 1 teaspoon browning optional

      Instructions

      • Place all of the ingredients into a blender. Blend until you get a smooth paste.
      • Use jerk marinade over your favorite proteins and vegetables before cooking.

      Notes

      • Use about 3-4 tablespoons of marinade per 1 pound of meat.
      • For best results, let your meat marinate for at least 24 hours to allow the flavors to penetrate fully.
      • This marinade can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to a week. Always discard any unused marinade that has come into contact with raw meat.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 1g | Calories: 38kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 409mg | Potassium: 56mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 93IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 0.3mg

      This post was originally published on June 9th, 2023. It has been updated with helpful information.

      Salmon Wellington

      March 24, 2026 by Tanya Harris 36 Comments

      close up photo of cut salmon wellington

      My salmon wellington is buttery, flaky puff pastry wrapped around tender salmon, herby cream cheese, and fresh spinach.

      close up photo of salmon wellington cut on table

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      This is one of my favorite ways to cook salmon! It's such a classic dish, and it's so much easier to make than you think!

      It's ready to serve in less than 45 minutes and pairs perfectly with recipes like air-fried carrots and green beans.

      Be sure to try my Easy Oven-Baked Salmon recipe too.

      5 Star Review

      ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐

      Kelly says, "Delicious and comes together easily. Looks impressive when done. I will definitely be making this again"

      How To Make A Salmon Wellington

      Combine spinach, cream cheese, Worcestershire sauce, salt, onion powder, garlic powder, black pepper, and parmesan cheese in a bowl.

      Mix until fully combined.

      spinach mixture in bowl

      Season the salmon with a little salt and pepper.

      Lay the puff pastry on a flat surface and roll until smooth. In the center of the pastry, add half of the spinach mixture

      spinach mixture on puff pastry

      Lay the salmon on top. Add the remaining spinach mixture on top of the salmon. Fold the sides of the puff pastry over to enclose the spinach and salmon.

      Flip the pastry over and place it on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper.

      puff pastry on sheetpan
      puff pastry on sheetpan ends tucked in

      Score the pastry with a paring knife. Brush the beaten egg over the pastry.

      egg on scored puff pastry

      Bake in a preheated oven until the top is nice and golden. Remove and enjoy.

      cooked salmon wellington

      Can you make this ahead of time?

      This salmon recipe is best served straight out of the oven so that the salmon is perfectly fresh and the pastry is flaky. If you have leftovers, store them in an airtight container for up to 3 days.

      You can reheat it in the oven at 400F for 5 to 8 minutes until warmed through to serve.

      Can you freeze salmon en croute?

      If you are planning to make this as part of a bigger feast or are looking for a freezer meal, this is a great option. You can freeze the uncooked wellington and then cook it straight from frozen.

      Freeze it on a baking sheet. Once solid, wrap it in plastic wrap and foil, and it will keep for up to 3 months. Cook the frozen wellington in a preheated oven at 400F for about 45 minutes.

      cut salmon wellington pn plate

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • Thaw the puff pastry sheet according to the package instructions.
      • You can cut the spinach and cheese mixture in half if you prefer, and place the mixture on one side of the salmon.  
      close up of salmon wellington

      More Easy Fish Recipes

      • Marinated Air Fryer Salmon
      • Instant Pot Salmon with Creamy Sauce
      • Crispy Air Fryer Fish
      • Fried Catfish
      close up photo of cut salmon wellington
      Print Recipe
      4.80 from 24 votes

      Salmon Wellington Recipe

      This salmon wellington recipe (salmon en croute) is simple enough for a family meal, but fancy enough to impress company! Easy to prep, this impressive main course is wonderfully fresh and delicious.
      Prep Time15 minutes mins
      Cook Time30 minutes mins
      Total Time45 minutes mins
      Course: Main Course
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: easy salmon in pastry, salmon wellington, simple salmon wellington recipe
      Servings: 6 servings
      Calories: 525kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 12 oz frozen spinach drained and squeezed dry
      • 8 oz cream cheese softened and cut into cubes
      • 1 Tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
      • 1 teaspoon salt* or to taste
      • ½ teaspoon onion powder
      • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
      • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
      • ½ cup shredded parmesan cheese
      • 1 lb skinless salmon
      • 1 puff pastry sheet thawed
      • 1 medium egg lightly beaten
      • Salt and pepper to taste

      Instructions

      • Preheat oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
      • Combine spinach, cream cheese,Worcestershire sauce, salt, onion powder, garlic powder, black pepper, and parmesan cheese in a bowl. Mix until fully combined.
      • Season salmon with a little bit of salt and pepper. Lay puff pastry on flat surface and roll until smooth. In the center of the pastry, add half of the spinach mixture, then lay salmon on top, then add remaining spinach mixture on top.
      • Fold over sides of puff pastry to enclose spinach and salmon inside the pastry. Flip the pastry over and place on sheet pan lined with parchment paper. Score the pastry with a pairing knife and brush egg over the pastry.
      • Bake in preheated oven for 30-35 minutes or until the top is nice and golden. Remove and enjoy.

      Video

      Notes

      Thaw the puff pastry sheet according to the instructions on the package.
      You can cut the spinach and cheese mixture in half if you prefer and place the mixture on one side of the salmon.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 525kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 37g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Cholesterol: 118mg | Sodium: 859mg | Potassium: 807mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 5966IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 206mg | Iron: 4mg

      This post was originally published June 12th, 2020. It has been updated with new photos.

      Liver and Onions (with Pan Gravy)

      March 13, 2026 by Tanya Harris 4 Comments

      Liver and onions in skillet with salt and pepper on side

      This liver and onions recipe is rich, savory, and smothered in a simple pan sauce that takes it far beyond the basic.

      Liver and onions in skillet with salt and pepper on side

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      Tanya holding liver and onions

      I grew up eating liver and onions at my grandmother's table. She made it regularly, partly because she loved it and partly because she knew it was packed with nutrition.

      As a kid, I wasn't exactly rushing to the table for it. But now I make it for my own family from time to time, and I've added my own touch: a simple pan sauce made with beef broth and apple cider vinegar.

      If you love hearty, old-fashioned comfort food, you might also enjoy my Smothered Chicken or my Classic Pot Roast for more of that same cozy, satisfying energy.

      Liver and Onions At A Glance

      • Prep Time: 15 minutes
      • Cook Time: 30-35 minutes
      • Total Time: 45-50 minutes
      • Serves: 4
      • Best For: Weeknight dinners, comfort food cravings

      A Quick Look at The Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Liver (beef or calf, 1 lb) - Either works here, but they cook differently. Calf liver is more delicate with a milder flavor, while beef liver is bolder and more intense. If using calf liver, keep a close eye on the simmer time.
      • Yellow onion - Sliced thin so it softens and sweetens quickly in the butter. One large onion is just right for 1 pound of liver.
      • All-purpose flour - Used to dredge the liver before frying. It creates a light crust and helps thicken the pan sauce.
      • Salt and black pepper - Mixed directly into the flour for even seasoning on every piece. Feel free to add more if you want, like seasoned salt, garlic powder, etc.
      • Beef broth - The base of the pan sauce. You could also use chicken broth if that's what you have on hand.
      • Apple cider vinegar - Just a tablespoon, but it brightens the whole dish and cuts through the richness of the liver.
      • Unsalted butter - Used to cook the onions low and slow. It adds flavor and keeps the onions from burning.
      • Olive oil - Used to fry the liver at a higher heat. The combination of butter (for the onions) and oil (for the liver) gives you the best results from both. You could use any neutral high-heat oil here, like canola or avocado.
      Ingredients for liver and onions

      How to Make Liver and Onions

      Below is a printable recipe card with the instructions. Here you will find the step-by-step photos of each step.

      Step 1: Rinse the liver under cold water and pat it completely dry with paper towels. If the pieces are very large, cut them into more manageable sizes. Slice your onion into thin rings or half-moons, set aside.

      In a shallow dish, stir together the flour, salt, and black pepper. Dredge each piece of liver in the seasoned flour, coating both sides and shaking off any excess.

      onion being sliced in kitchen
      Liver being coated in seasoned flour

      Step 2: In a large skillet over medium heat, melt the butter. Add the sliced onion and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened and lightly golden, about 8-10 minutes. Transfer the onions to a plate and set aside, leaving as much of the butter and browned bits in the pan as possible.

      Onions cooking in skillet

      Step 3: Add the olive oil to the same skillet and raise the heat to medium-high. Once the oil is hot and shimmering, add the floured liver in a single layer. Work in batches if needed to avoid crowding the pan. Fry until browned on the outside and still slightly pink in the center, about 2-3 minutes per side depending on thickness. Remove the liver and set it aside on a plate.

      Liver frying in skillet

      Step 4: Reduce the heat to medium. Pour in the beef broth and use a wooden spoon to scrape up all the browned bits from the bottom of the pan.

      Step 5: Return the cooked onions and liver to the skillet. Stir gently to coat everything in the sauce. Reduce the heat to medium-low, cover, and cook for 15-20 minutes. If you are using calf liver, start checking for doneness around the 10-12 minute mark. The liver should be tender but still holding together. Add apple cider vinegar and stir it into the broth. Turn off the heat.

      Liver and onions cooking in skillet

      Step 6: Serve hot with plenty of that pan sauce spooned over the top.

      Liver and onions on plate

      Serving Suggestions

      Liver and onions are a natural match for starchy, comforting sides that soak up the sauce. My Creamy Garlic Mashed Potatoes are a top choice, or keep it simple with Microwave Mashed Potatoes on a weeknight.

      White rice works just as well if that's what you have. For greens on the side, try my Southern Collard Greens or Southern Green Beans.

      Make Ahead and Storage

      Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. The liver will continue to absorb the sauce as it sits, which actually deepens the flavor.

      Reheating: Reheat gently over medium-low heat on the stovetop, adding a splash of beef broth if the sauce has thickened too much. Avoid high heat, which can make the liver tough.

      Freezing: Liver and onions can be frozen for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before reheating.

      Liver and onions in skillet

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • Pat the liver very dry before dredging. Moisture is the enemy of a good sear. If the liver is wet, it will steam instead of browning.
      • Some people choose to soak the liver in milk before cooking to mellow out the flavor. I skip this step because I actually like the taste of liver. If you are more sensitive to that strong, mineral flavor, a 30-minute soak in milk can take the edge off. Or use calf liver for a more mellow flavor.
      • Watch the simmer time closely, especially with calf liver. It is more delicate than beef liver and will fall apart if you cook it too long. Start checking at 10-12 minutes.

      Frequently Asked Questions

      What is the difference between beef liver and calf liver?

      Beef liver has a stronger, more pronounced flavor and is firmer in texture. Calf liver is milder and more tender, which makes it more forgiving for people who are newer to cooking liver. Both work in this recipe, but calf liver needs a shorter simmer time.

      How do I know when the liver is done?

      After the initial sear, the liver should be browned on the outside and still slightly pink in the center before returning to the sauce. After simmering, it should be cooked through, tender, and holding its shape. If it is falling apart, it has cooked too long.

      Related Recipes

      I hope you love this liver and onions recipe as much as we do. If you are looking for more hearty, satisfying dinners, try these out:

      • Smothered Chicken - Tender chicken smothered in a rich, savory onion gravy.
      • Smothered Turkey Wings - Fall-off-the-bone turkey wings in a deeply seasoned sauce.
      • Classic Pot Roast - A slow cooker pot roast that is pure comfort food.
      • Braised Beef Shanks - Rich, fall-off-the-bone beef shanks in a flavorful braise.
      • Onion Gravy - A simple, savory onion gravy that goes great over just about everything.
      Liver and onions in skillet with salt and pepper on side
      Print Recipe
      5 from 1 vote

      Liver and Onions Recipe

      This liver and onions recipe is smothered in a savory pan sauce made with beef broth and apple cider vinegar. Tender, pan-fried liver with caramelized onions, all finished in one skillet.
      Prep Time15 minutes mins
      Cook Time30 minutes mins
      Total Time45 minutes mins
      Course: entree
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: how to make liver and onions, liver and onions
      Servings: 4 servings
      Calories: 311kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 1 lb liver beef or calf
      • 1 large yellow onion sliced
      • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
      • 1 teaspoon salt
      • ½ teaspoon black pepper
      • 1 ¼ cup beef broth
      • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
      • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
      • 2 tablespoons olive oil

      Instructions

      • Rinse the liver under cold water and pat dry with paper towels. If slices are large, cut into more manageable pieces. In a shallow dish, combine the flour, salt, and black pepper. Dredge the liver in the seasoned flour, coating both sides and shaking off any excess. Slice the onion into thin rings or half-moons.
      • In a large skillet over medium heat, melt the butter. Add the sliced onion and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened and lightly golden, about 8-10 minutes. Transfer onions to a plate, leaving the butter and browned bits in the pan.
      • Add the olive oil to the same skillet and increase the heat to medium-high. When the oil is hot and shimmering, add the floured liver in a single layer (work in batches if needed). Fry until browned on the outside and still slightly pink in the center, about 2-3 minutes per side. Remove the liver and set aside.
      • Reduce heat to medium. Pour in the beef broth. Use a wooden spoon to scrape up all the browned bits from the bottom of the pan.
      • Return the onions and liver to the skillet. Stir gently to coat everything in the sauce. Reduce heat to medium-low, cover, and cook for 15-20 minutes. If using calf liver, begin checking for doneness at 10-12 minutes. The liver should be tender and holding together, not falling apart.
      • Stir in the apple cider vinegar. Serve hot with the pan sauce spooned over the top. Great with mashed potatoes, rice, or your favorite side.

      Notes

      • Calf liver is more delicate than beef liver and will fall apart with too much simmer time. Start checking at 10-12 minutes and pull it when it is tender but still holding its shape.
      • Pat the liver very dry before dredging for the best sear.
      • store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 311kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 327mg | Sodium: 941mg | Potassium: 452mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 19339IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 6mg

      Air Fryer Fried Chicken

      March 11, 2026 by Tanya Harris 478 Comments

      Air fryer fried chicken on a white platter

      This Air Fryer Fried Chicken is golden brown, juicy, and full of flavor, thanks to a simple buttermilk and hot sauce marinade.

      Air fryer fried chicken on a white platter

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      5 Star Review

      ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐

      Linda says, "I’ve made this several times and it always turns out yummy."

      pic of Tanya

      Southern fried chicken is a classic comfort food, but for a long time, I wasn’t that excited about it. In fact, the only fried chicken I usually ate was air-fried chicken wings tossed in an Asian-inspired sauce.

      That changed when I made fried chicken in my air fryer. Marinating the pieces in buttermilk and hot sauce gave me fried chicken that was beautifully golden on the outside and juicy on the inside, with way more flavor than I expected.

      Whether you’re new to frying chicken or just looking for an easier way to make it at home, this air fryer version is a simple, flavorful place to start.

      With love, Tanya

      AIR FRYER FRIED CHICKEN AT A GLANCE

      • Prep Time: 10 minutes
      • Cook Time: 25 minutes
      • Marinade Time: 1–24 hours
      • Total Time: 35 minutes (plus marinating)
      • Serves: 4 people
      • Best For: Comfort food cravings, Sunday dinners, family meals, game day, and when you want classic fried chicken with less oil

      A Quick Look at the Ingredients Needed

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Whole chicken cut into separate pieces (breast, thigh, wing, and leg)
      • For the Marinade: Hot sauce (I use Texas Pete) and Buttermilk. Choose a mild hot sauce and avoid very spicy ones like sriracha.
      • Seasoned flour: All-purpose flour, seasoned salt, garlic powder, onion powder, Italian seasoning, and cayenne pepper.
      • Canola or vegetable oil: for spraying the chicken.
      Ingredients for air fryer fried chicken on a wood table

      How to Make Air Fryer Fried Chicken

      Step 1: Marinate your chicken. I use a mixture of half buttermilk and half hot sauce. I learned the hot sauce trick from my mother-in-law. The buttermilk helps keep the chicken juicy on the inside, and the hot sauce adds flavor. Don't worry about it being spicy; it won't be if you use a milder hot sauce. You can marinate in the refrigerator for 1 to 24 hours. 

      Step 2: Combine flour, Italian seasoning, seasoning salt, garlic powder, onion powder, and cayenne pepper. I use a whisk to ensure that my flour is fully seasoned.

      Step 3: Grab a pair of tongs and remove one piece of chicken from the buttermilk mixture, allowing it to drain off a bit, and place it in the flour mixture. Use the tongs to make sure the chicken pieces are fully coated.

      Raw chicken soaking in hot sauce and buttermilk.
      Marinated chicken in flour mixture.

      Step 4: Lightly spray your air fryer basket with oil, or add a parchment liner with holes if your basket tends to stick. Place the floured chicken pieces on top, in a single layer, with space between each piece so the air can circulate. If using parchment, be sure the chicken is on the liner before you start the air fryer—loose parchment can fly up into the heating coil and be a fire hazard, and could start a fire if it hits the heating element.

      Step 5: Close the air fryer drawer, set the temperature to 390 degrees Fahrenheit, and set the timer to 25 minutes.

      Step 6: After about 13 minutes, open the Air Fryer. Your chicken should look like the photo below on the left (still showing some dry flour spots). Grab your Air Fryer oil spray bottle and spray those flour spots. Then grab some tongs and flip your chicken. Spray this side of the chicken as well, covering all flour spots. Close your Air Fryer and let it resume cooking.

      raw floured chicken in air fryer basket
      chicken cooking in air fryer basket

      Step 7: Once your cooking cycle is done, use a quick-read thermometer to ensure your chicken is fully cooked to 165 degrees Fahrenheit. Remove and enjoy 🙂

      air fryer fried chicken in air fryer basket

      There you have it! Delicious Southern Style Buttermilk Soaked Air Fryer Fried Chicken.

      Other Chicken Recipes in the Air Fryer You May Enjoy

      If you like chicken in the air fryer, try these out:

      • Air Fryer Whole Chicken (Peruvian Style) - the marinade for this recipe is simply amazing.
      • BBQ Air Fryer Chicken Breast - For that BBQ flavor, but made quickly in the air fryer.
      • Air Fryer Chicken Nuggets - Another way to fry chicken in the air fryer, these nuggets are brined in pickle juice, then breaded and air-fried.
      • Air Fryer Chicken Wings - My go-to way to make wings these days. I love cooking wings in the air fryer and tossing them in all kinds of sauces.

      Make it a Meal

      Fried chicken deserves good sides. Here are some of my favorites to make this a full meal.

      • Air Fryer Potato Wedges (KFC Copycat) - Crispy on the outside, fluffy on the inside, these KFC-style Air Fryer Potato Wedges are an easy, family-friendly side dish for your Air Fryer Fried Chicken.
      • Sweet and Spicy Air Fryer Brussels Sprouts - If you think you don’t like Brussels sprouts, these sweet, slightly spicy, crispy bites might change your mind.
      • Kale and Broccoli Salad - I love serving this crunchy kale and broccoli salad on the side for something fresh and green with all that crispy chicken.
      • Southern Style Pressure Cooker Collard Greens - These collard greens give you that classic Southern flavor without babysitting a pot on the stove all day.
      • Old Fashioned Potato Salad - this salad is perfect for fried chicken nights, cookouts, and potlucks.
      crispy chicken on white plate

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • I do not recommend overlapping the chicken pieces in this recipe. It’s best to have the chicken pieces in a single layer and not touching. That way, the air can circulate around the chicken, crisping it and giving it a nice, golden crust.   
      • Remember to spray lightly with oil. The purpose of the oil in this recipe is to cover the dried flour spots. Not spraying with oil will have those flour spots tasting like you would imagine they would, dry flour. Use an oil with a high-smoke point for your chicken.
      • If using parchment liners, make sure you place the chicken on them before starting the Air Fryer. Not doing so will cause the liners to fly into the fan, get caught, and possibly start a fire.
      • Timing will vary depending on the Air Fryer brand. Use a meat thermometer to ensure your chicken has reached at least 165°F. My chicken usually reaches 180 degrees or higher and remains juicy and deliciously crisp.  

      How to store leftover fried chicken

      To refrigerate: Keep any leftover fried chicken in an airtight container in the fridge for 3-4 days. To heat up, warm the chicken in a preheated oven at 400F until warmed through.

      For freezing: Once cooked and cooled, place any pieces of leftover chicken into an airtight container and store in the freezer for up to 3 months. 

      FAQs:

      What if my breading doesn't stick?

      You can place your chicken pieces in the fridge for 10-15 minutes after breading, and before air frying. This will help if you have trouble with the breading staying on.

      Can I use boneless, skinless chicken breasts or thighs?

      You can, but the results will be a little different. The skin helps the coating stick and get extra crispy, and bone-in pieces stay juicier. If you use boneless, skinless chicken, reduce the cook time and keep a close eye on the internal temperature so it doesn’t dry out.

      If you have tried my Air Fryer Fried Chicken or any other recipe on my blog, then please rate it and let me know how it turned out in the comments below!

      Air fryer fried chicken on a white platter
      Print Recipe
      4.78 from 177 votes

      Air Fryer Fried Chicken Recipe

      This Air Fryer fried chicken is a healthier and easier version of traditional fried chicken. Soaked in buttermilk and hot sauce, covered in seasoned flour, and air fried to perfection.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time25 minutes mins
      Marinade1 hour hr
      Total Time35 minutes mins
      Course: Main Course
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: air fryer chicken breast, air fryer fried chicken
      Servings: 4 people
      Calories: 318kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      Marinade

      • ½ whole chicken cut into separate pieces (breast, thigh, wing, and leg)
      • ½ cup hot sauce
      • ½ cup buttermilk

      Seasoning

      • ¾ cup All-Purpose Flour
      • 2 teaspoon seasoning salt
      • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
      • 1 teaspoon onion powder
      • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
      • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper
      • Oil for spraying Canola or Vegetable

      Instructions

      • Place chicken pieces in buttermilk and hot sauce. Place in refrigerator and allow to marinate anytime from 1-24 hours.
      • Whisk together all-purpose flour, seasoning salt, garlic powder, onion powder, italian seasoning, and cayenne pepper in a bowl. Set aside.
      • Place a parchment liner in the Air Fryer basket.
      • Remove a piece of chicken from the buttermilk mixture and place in the flour mixture, coating all sides of the chicken and shaking off any excess flour. Place the chicken pieces in the basket in a single layer.
      • Close the Air Fryer basket and set temperature to 390 degrees Fahrenheit and timer to 25 minutes. Start the Air Fryer.
      • After 13 minutes, open the air fryer and spray any flour spots on the chicken. Flip the chicken and spray the other side with oil, ensuring all the flour spots are covered. Close the Air fryer and cook for 12 more minutes.
      • Once the timer is up, open the Air Fryer and check chicken pieces with a quick read thermometer. Chicken is done when it reaches an internal temperature of 165 degrees at the thickest part of the chicken.

      Video

      Notes

      • I do not recommend overlapping the chicken pieces in this recipe. It’s best to have the chicken pieces in a single layer and not touching. That way, the air can circulate around the chicken to crisp it and give it a nice, golden crust.  
      • Remember to spray lightly with oil. The purpose of the oil in this recipe is to cover the dried flour spots. Not spraying with oil will have those flour spots tasting like you would imagine they would, dry flour.
      • Some breading will fall off, whether you use the liners or not. However, much less breading falls off when using the parchment liners.
      • If using parchment liners, make sure you place the chicken on them before starting the Air Fryer. Not doing so will cause the liners to fly into the fan, get caught, and possibly start a fire.
      • Timing will vary depending on the Air Fryer brand. Use a meat thermometer to ensure your chicken has reached at least 165 degrees Fahrenheit. My chicken usually reaches 180 degrees or higher and remains juicy and deliciously crisp.  
      • Use any part of the chicken you like that has skin on. The breading may not stick to skinless chicken, and it may not be as crispy. 
      • I use Texas Pete hot sauce in this recipe. If you are sensitive to heat or use a spicier brand, reduce the amount of hot sauce.  
      Suggested Tools for Air Fryer Fried Chicken
      • Air Fryer Parchment Liners (They come in different sizes so make sure to select the one that correlates to your size of Air Fryer)
      • Oil bottle for spraying
      • Tongs for flipping (I like to have a few around)
      • Quick Read Thermometer 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 318kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 74mg | Sodium: 2055mg | Potassium: 297mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 325IU | Vitamin C: 23.9mg | Calcium: 56mg | Iron: 2.3mg

      This post was originally published on March 5, 2019. It has been updated with additional helpful tips.

      Homemade Vegetable Broth

      March 5, 2026 by Tanya Harris Leave a Comment

      vegetable broth in glass jar

      This homemade vegetable broth is rich, deeply flavorful, and made entirely from simple vegetables and aromatics you likely already have on hand. Once you start making your own, you’ll want to keep a batch in the freezer at all times.

      vegetable broth in glass jar

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      Tanya holding vegetable broth

      I find that so many dishes have a base of broth or stock. There's this Slow Cooker Chicken Broth that I love to stash in the freezer, but one broth I keep coming back to is vegetable broth. It’s made with ingredients you likely already have rolling around in your fridge, like onions, carrots, and celery, and the flavor it produces is really good.

      This is something I like to make ahead and keep on hand. I use it in rice dishes, soups, stews, and anywhere that needs a little extra boost of flavor. It’s a simple swap that makes a big difference. If you’ve never made your own broth before, I promise this recipe will make you a convert.

      Love, Tanya

      Vegetable Broth at a Glance

      • Prep Time: 15 minutes
      • Cook Time: 1 to 1½ hours
      • Total Time: About 1 hour 45 minutes
      • Makes: About 8 cups of broth
      • Best For: Meal prep, soups, rice dishes, stews, anywhere that calls for broth

      A Quick Look at the Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Carrots, Celery, and Onion form the classic flavor base for this broth. No need to peel the carrots, just scrub and chop. Leave the skin on the onion for a beautiful golden color. Use the whole celery stalk, including the leafy tops.
      • Garlic is smashed with the flat side of a knife. No need to peel it.
      • Baby Portabella Mushrooms add a savory, umami-rich flavor to the broth, making it taste more complex. Cut them in half before adding.
      • Fresh Ginger is sliced into coins and added. I love ginger and add it to my broth whenever I get a chance. If you don’t have it on hand, you can skip it, but I love what it brings.
      • Black Peppercorns, Bay Leaves, Fresh Parsley, and Fresh Thyme are your aromatics. Together, they build that classic, herbaceous broth flavor. Dried parsley and thyme work fine as substitutes.
      • Cold Water helps draw out the flavor from the vegetables slowly as it comes up to heat.
      • Salt to taste at the end. I usually add about 1 teaspoon of fine sea salt, but taste and adjust to your preference.
      ingredients for vegetable broth on table

      How to Make Homemade Vegetable Broth

      Step 1: Prep your vegetables by rinsing them and cutting them into smaller pieces. I aim to cut the carrots, onions, and celery into ½ inch cubes. The smaller the pieces are, the quicker they will release flavor.

      Step 2: Combine everything in the pot by adding all of the vegetables, herbs, peppercorns, and bay leaves to a large pot (at least 4 quarts). Pour in the cold water. It should just cover the vegetables.

      fresh vegetables in pot covered with water

      Step 3: Bring to a boil over high heat, then immediately lower the heat to medium-low to simmer. You want a gentle simmer, just a few bubbles breaking the surface, not a rapid boil. Leave the pot uncovered and simmer for 1 to 1½ hours.

      cooked vegetable broth in pot

      Step 4: Check your broth for doneness by tasting. I like to taste one of the cooked vegetables in the broth. If it tastes bland, the flavor has transferred into the liquid, and you’re ready to strain. Place a fine-mesh strainer over a large bowl. Carefully pour the broth through, then gently press the vegetables with the back of a spoon to squeeze out any extra liquid. Discard or compost the solids.

      strained vegetable broth being lifted with spoon out of pot

      Step 5: Season and Store by letting the broth cool to room temperature for about 10 minutes, then transferring it to airtight containers. Salt to taste. I usually add about 1 teaspoon of fine sea salt.

      vegetable broth bottles on table

      What Are the Best Vegetables for Broth?

      One of the best things about making vegetable broth at home is its flexibility. The foundation is always carrots, celery, and onion, but you can add leeks for a milder sweetness, mushrooms for depth, or a spoonful of tomato paste for a little richness and color. Fresh herb stems and garlic round everything out. If you cook regularly, you probably already have most of this on hand.

      Vegetables to Avoid

      Some vegetables can make your broth bitter or produce off-flavors. It’s best to skip:

      • Brassicas like broccoli, cauliflower, Brussels sprouts, and cabbage. They turn bitter and can give the broth a sulfurous smell.
      • Beets. They will turn your broth bright red or purple and can overpower everything else.
      • Starchy vegetables like potatoes. They make the broth cloudy and starchy rather than clear and clean.

      Vegetable scraps are a great way to build flavor over time. Save carrot peels, onion skins, celery tops, and parsley stems in a zip-lock bag in the freezer, and when you’ve got enough, make a batch of broth.

      How to Use Vegetable Broth

      This broth is so versatile. Here are some of my favorite ways to use it:

      • Use it in place of water when cooking rice. Try it in my Easy Yellow Rice Recipe or Oven Baked Rice for a huge flavor upgrade.
      • Use it as the base for soups like my Black Bean Soup, Collard Green Soup, or Creamy Broccoli Cheddar Soup.
      • Stir it into beans while cooking for extra flavor. It’s great in my Pinto Beans Recipe or Red Beans and Rice.
      • Use it in stews and braises, like my Stovetop Beef Stew or Hearty Instant Pot Vegetable Soup.

      Make Ahead and Storage

      • Storage: Once cooled, transfer the broth to airtight containers and refrigerate for up to 5 days.
      • Freezing: Pour into freezer bags, mason jars (leave headspace), or ice cube trays for easy portioned use. Freeze for up to 3 months. The ice cube method is great when you just need a small amount to deglaze a pan or add to rice.
      • Reheating: Thaw overnight in the refrigerator or warm directly from frozen in a small saucepan over low heat.

      Tanya’s Top Tips

      • Salt at the end, not the beginning. The broth reduces as it simmers, so salting at the end gives you better control over the final seasoning.
      • Taste a vegetable to know when it’s done. When the carrot or celery tastes like nothing, the flavor is in the liquid. That’s your green light to strain.
      • Freeze in portions. I love using a silicone ice cube tray to freeze broth in small amounts so I always have a little bit on hand without defrosting a whole batch.

      Related Recipes

      I hope you love this homemade vegetable broth as much as we do. If you’re looking for more broth or stock recipes, try these out:

      • Slow Cooker Chicken Broth is my go-to chicken broth recipe, and I make it and freeze it for whenever I need it.
      • Shrimp stock is another flavorful option that works well in soups, stews, and seafood-based dishes.
      vegetable broth in glass jar
      Print Recipe
      No ratings yet

      Homemade Vegetable Broth

      This homemade vegetable broth is rich, flavorful, and made with simple vegetables you likely already have on hand. Make it ahead and use it in soups, rice dishes, stews, and more.
      Prep Time15 minutes mins
      Cook Time1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
      Total Time1 hour hr 45 minutes mins
      Course: Pantry Staples
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: vegetable broth
      Servings: 8
      Calories: 30kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 4 carrots scrubbed and cut into rough ½-inch chunks
      • 4 celery stalks chopped into ½-inch pieces
      • 1 large onion quartered (skin on), about 2½ cups
      • 4 garlic cloves smashed
      • 8 oz baby bella mushrooms halved
      • 2- inch piece fresh ginger sliced into ¼-inch coins
      • 1 teaspoon black peppercorns
      • 2 bay leaves
      • Small handful fresh parsley about ¼ cup (or 1 tablespoon dried)
      • 3 to 4 sprigs fresh thyme or 1 teaspoon dried
      • 12 cups cold water
      • 1 teaspoon fine sea salt or to taste

      Instructions

      • Add all of the vegetables, herbs, peppercorns, and bay leaves to a large pot (at least 4 quarts). Pour in the cold water. It should just cover the vegetables.
      • Bring to a boil. Place the pot over high heat and bring to a boil. Reduce the heat to medium-low and simmer uncovered for 1 to 1½ hours. You want a gentle simmer, not a rapid boil.
      • Set a fine-mesh strainer over a large bowl. Pour the broth through, pressing gently on the vegetables to squeeze out the last of the liquid. Discard the solids.
      • Salt to taste (about 1 teaspoon fine sea salt). Let cool to room temperature before transferring to airtight containers.

      Video

      Notes

      • Makes about 8 cups of broth, depending on evaporation during simmering.
      • To check for doneness, taste one of the cooked vegetables. If it tastes bland, the flavor has transferred to the water, and you’re ready to strain.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 30kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.04g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 334mg | Potassium: 273mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 5127IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 37mg | Iron: 0.4mg

      Homemade Ketchup Recipe

      February 26, 2026 by Tanya Harris Leave a Comment

      ketchup next to fries

      This homemade ketchup recipe is made with simple pantry staples and comes together in around 10 minutes. It's slightly sweet, full of real tomato flavor, and a perfect condiment to have on hand at home.

      ketchup next to fries

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      Tanya holding ketchup

      Ketchup is not something I usually make from scratch. Condiments are one of those things I just buy unless they're something specialty, like my Homemade Remoulade Sauce or Homemade Browning Sauce. But there was that one day I needed ketchup, didn't want to run to the store, and decided to figure it out myself.

      That first batch was okay. Since then, I've tweaked it into this quick, delicious homemade ketchup recipe. I went back and forth on whether to cook it or just mix everything together in a bowl, but the quick stovetop version won every time. I hope you enjoy it, whether you're trying to make more things from scratch or you just find yourself out of ketchup with a random can of tomato paste in the pantry.

      Love, Tanya

      HOMEMADE KETCHUP AT A GLANCE

      • Prep Time:  5 minutes
      • Cook Time:  5 minutes
      • Total Time:  10 minutes
      • Makes:  About 1 cup
      • Best For:  Everyday condiment, meal prep, dipping sauce

      A Quick Look at The Ingredients

      • Tomato paste — A 6-oz can is the base of this recipe. Using tomato paste instead of fresh tomatoes keeps this recipe quick and gives you that deep, concentrated tomato flavor you expect from ketchup.
      • Liquids - Water and apple cider vinegar - both of these thin the ketchup out, while the vinegar gives the ketchup its tangy taste. If you find your ketchup too thick, add a little more water to thin it out.
      • Granulated sugar — Balances out the acidity from the vinegar and tomato.
      • Salt — Brings everything together.
      •  Seasonings - onion powder, garlic powder, and ground allspice.
      ingredients for ketchup on table

      How to Make Homemade Ketchup

      This recipe comes together entirely on the stovetop in one small saucepan. No blender, no special equipment — just a whisk and about 10 minutes.

      Step 1: Add all ingredients to a small saucepan. Whisk everything together until smooth and fully combined. Make sure there are no lumps of tomato paste.

      hand whisking ketchup ingredients in pot

      Step 2: Bring the mixture to a gentle simmer over medium heat, stirring frequently to prevent sticking. You'll start to see small bubbles forming.

      Step 3: Reduce the heat to medium-low and continue simmering for about 5 minutes, stirring occasionally. The ketchup is ready when the flavors have melded together, and it has thickened slightly. It will continue to thicken as it cools.

      bubbling ketchup in pot

      Step 4: Remove from heat and let the ketchup cool to room temperature. Taste and adjust. Transfer to a jar or a squeeze bottle, then refrigerate.

      ketchup in bottle being picked up with spoon

      Variations

      • Spicy ketchup: Add a pinch of cayenne pepper or a few dashes of hot sauce to the pot. Start small and taste as you go.
      • Smoky ketchup: Stir in ¼ teaspoon of smoked paprika along with the other spices.
      • Less sweet: Reduce the sugar by 1 tablespoon if you prefer a more savory ketchup.
      • Sugar-free option: Swap the granulated sugar for a sugar substitute like monk fruit sweetener, using the same amount.

      Does Homemade Ketchup Taste Like Store-Bought?

      It's close, but not identical. Store-bought ketchup has a distinct flavor due to its precise formula and added ingredients. This homemade version is simpler, with a clearer tomato flavor, a slight vinegar edge from apple cider vinegar, and warmth from allspice. My daughter preferred it, which says a lot.

      The texture will also be slightly different. I find it a little thicker than store-bought ketchups, perfect for dipping fries or topping a burger. If it's too thick for your liking, add a little bit of water to thin it out.

      ketchup in bottle with label that says ketchup

      Make Ahead and Storage

      • Storage: Transfer cooled ketchup to an airtight jar or squeeze bottle and refrigerate for up to 2 weeks. Give it a stir or shake before using.
      • Freezing: Freeze in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge and stir well before serving.
      • Make ahead: This recipe doubles easily, so make a larger batch and keep it in the fridge.

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • You will notice I added allspice to my recipe. I love the addition of allspice, but if you don't have it, feel free to sub with another warm spice like cinnamon or nutmeg for a slightly different flavor profile.
      • Whisk until fully smooth before heating. Lumps of tomato paste that don't get incorporated early may stick to the bottom of the pan as the mixture heats up.
      • It thickens as it cools. If your ketchup looks a little thin right off the stove, don't panic. Let it cool fully before deciding if it needs more time on the heat.

      Related Recipes

      I hope you love this homemade ketchup recipe as much as we do. If you're looking for more homemade sauces and condiments, try these out:

      • Big Mac Sauce (Homemade & Easy) — A creamy copycat sauce that's great on burgers and as a dip.
      • Homemade Remoulade Sauce — A bold sauce perfect for seafood, fries, and sandwiches.
      • Homemade Browning Sauce — A pantry staple for adding rich, deep color and flavor to meats and gravies.
      ketchup next to fries
      Print Recipe
      No ratings yet

      Homemade Ketchup Recipe

      This homemade ketchup is made with simple pantry ingredients and comes together in around 10 minutes.
      Prep Time5 minutes mins
      Cook Time5 minutes mins
      Total Time10 minutes mins
      Course: Condiment
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: homemade ketchup
      Servings: 16 servings
      Calories: 19kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 1 6 oz can tomato paste
      • ½ cup water
      • ¼ cup apple cider vinegar
      • 3 tablespoons granulated sugar
      • 1 ½ teaspoons salt
      • ½ teaspoon onion powder
      • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
      • ¼ teaspoon ground allspice

      Instructions

      • Add all ingredients to a small saucepan and whisk until smooth and well combined.
      • Bring to a gentle simmer over medium heat, stirring frequently.
      • Reduce heat to medium-low and simmer for about 5 minutes, stirring occasionally, until flavors have melded and the mixture has thickened slightly.
      • Remove from heat and let cool to room temperature.

      Notes

      • The ketchup will continue to thicken as it cools. If it seems thin right off the heat, let it cool completely before assessing the texture.
      • White vinegar can be substituted for apple cider vinegar. The flavor will be slightly sharper.
      • Store in an airtight jar in the refrigerator for up to 2 weeks.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 19kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 0.5g | Fat: 0.1g | Saturated Fat: 0.01g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 303mg | Potassium: 113mg | Fiber: 0.5g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 162IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 0.3mg

      Hummingbird Cake Recipe

      February 18, 2026 by Tanya Harris 9 Comments

      Slice of Hummingbird Cake on plate

      This hummingbird cake is moist, loaded with banana, crushed pineapple, and toasted pecans, and finished with a silky cream cheese frosting. It's one of my favorite layer cakes to make for a crowd.

      Slice of Hummingbird Cake on plate

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      Tanya holding a slice of Hummingbird Cake

      Hummingbird cake, a Southern classic, actually originated in Jamaica, known as Doctor Bird Cake after Jamaica's national bird. The recipe was shared by the Jamaican tourism industry in the late 1960s to promote travel. In 1978, Mrs. L.H. Wiggins submitted it to Southern Living, making it a staple.

      Similar to carrot cake, it's an oil-based layer cake with warm spices and cream cheese frosting, using bananas and pineapple for moisture.

      Growing up in a Jamaican household, I love its Caribbean roots. Toasted pecans add a nutty crunch. If you enjoy carrot cake or banana bread, this cake is for you.

      Love, Tanya

      HUMMINGBIRD CAKE AT A GLANCE

      • Prep Time: 20 minutes
      • Bake Time: 25-30 minutes
      • Total Time: 50 minutes (plus cooling time)
      • Serves: 16
      • Best For: Holidays, potlucks, special occasions, or anytime you want to impress

      A QUICK LOOK AT THE INGREDIENTS

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Dry Ingredients
        • All-purpose flour, baking soda, cinnamon, allspice, and salt — these get whisked together first. Sifting the flour keeps the crumb light and tender.
      • Wet Ingredients
        • White granulated sugar and light brown sugar — using both adds moisture and a subtle molasses depth.
        • Eggs, vegetable oil, and vanilla extract round out the base.
      • The Add-Ins
        • Crushed pineapple — do not drain it. The juice is what keeps this cake moist.
        • Mashed bananas — use ripe bananas for the best flavor. You'll need about 4–5 medium bananas for 2 cups mashed.
        • Chopped pecans — toasted first for deeper flavor and crunch. One cup goes into the batter, the rest goes on top.
      • For the Cream Cheese Frosting
        • Cream cheese and unsalted butter — both at room temperature so the frosting blends smoothly.
        • Powdered sugar, vanilla extract, and milk combine to make a silky frosting.
      Ingredients for cake portion of hummingbird cake
      Ingredients for cream cheese frosting for Hummingbird Cake

      HOW TO MAKE HUMMINGBIRD CAKE

      This hummingbird cake bakes in three 9-inch round cake pans, so you get beautiful layers with plenty of frosting between them.

      Step 1: Toast the pecans and prep your pans

      Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C). Grease and flour three 9-inch round cake pans, or line them with parchment paper. Spread the chopped pecans on a baking sheet and toast them in the oven for 5–7 minutes until fragrant. Keep a close eye on them, they can go from toasted to burnt quickly. Remove and let them cool.

      pecans toasting in oven

      Step 2: Mix the dry ingredients

      In a medium bowl, whisk together the flour, baking soda, salt, cinnamon, and allspice. Set aside.

      Step 3: Mix the wet ingredients

      In a large bowl, whisk the eggs, vegetable oil, granulated sugar, brown sugar, and vanilla extract until well combined.

      Flour and dry ingredients mixed in black bowl
      Wet ingredients mixed in yellow bowls.

      Step 4: Combine and fold

      Gradually add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients, stirring until just combined. The batter will look thick at this point. Fold in the crushed pineapple with its juice, the mashed bananas, and 1 cup of the toasted pecans. This will loosen the batter. Stir until everything is incorporated.

      Flour and what ingredients mixed in yellow bowl?
      Wet batter for hummingbird cake and yellow bowls

      Step 5: Bake the cake layers

      Divide the batter evenly among the three prepared cake pans. Bake for 25–30 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean. Let the cakes cool in the pans for 10 minutes, then transfer to a wire rack to cool completely before frosting.

      I'm in bird cake batter in the baking pan.
      Baked hummingbird cakes in the oven.

      Step 6: Make the cream cheese frosting

      Beat the cream cheese and butter together until smooth and creamy. Gradually add the sifted powdered sugar one cup at a time, mixing well after each addition. Stir in the vanilla and the milk, and mix until fully incorporated and fluffy.

      Cream cheese frosting on mixer whisks

      Step 7: Assemble and frost

      Spread a generous layer of frosting between each cake layer, then frost the top and sides of the cake. Sprinkle the remaining toasted pecans on top for decoration. For the best slices, refrigerate for at least 30 minutes before slicing to allow the frosting to set.

      Hummingbird cake on platter on kitchen island

      SERVING SUGGESTIONS

      This hummingbird cake is a showstopper on its own, but it is great as a dessert after a hearty meal. Serve it at Easter, Thanksgiving, or any potluck where you want something that feels both classic and a little unexpected.

      If you're making a full spread, it works well after a big comfort food dinner. The sweetness of the cake is a great contrast to savory, spiced dishes.

      MAKE AHEAD AND STORAGE

      • Storage: Store the frosted cake covered in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. The cake actually gets better after a day as the flavors meld together.
      • Freezing: You can freeze the cake slices, wrapped tightly in plastic wrap or foil paper, for up to 2 months. Thaw before enjoying.
      • Make-ahead tip: Bake the cake layers a day ahead, wrap tightly, and refrigerate. Make the frosting and assemble the next day.
      Hummingbird cake sliced on island

      TANYA'S TOP TIPS

      • Use ripe bananas. The riper, the better — they should be heavily speckled or even mostly brown. Ripe bananas are sweeter and mash more smoothly into the batter.
      • Toast the pecans. It only takes a few minutes and makes a real difference in flavor. Raw pecans in the batter will taste flat by comparison.
      • Cool completely before frosting. If the layers are even slightly warm, the cream cheese frosting will slide right off.
      Hummingbird cake slices from up top.

      RELATED RECIPES

      I hope you love this hummingbird cake recipe as much as we do. If you're looking for more cake and dessert recipes, try these out:

      • Moist Carrot Cake Recipe with Cream Cheese Frosting — The closest cousin to hummingbird cake, with a spiced oil-based crumb and a similar cream cheese frosting.
      • Mini Rum Carrot Cake — A fun Caribbean spin on carrot cake with a little rum flavor baked in.
      • Sweet Potato Bundt Cake — Another moist, spiced cake that's perfect for the holidays.
      • Best Banana Bread Recipe in the World — If you have extra ripe bananas after making this cake, this is the one to make.
      • Instant Pot Carrot Cake Cheesecake — For when you can't decide between carrot cake and cheesecake.
      Slice of Hummingbird Cake on plate
      Print Recipe
      5 from 1 vote

      Hummingbird Cake Recipe

      This hummingbird cake recipe is moist, packed with banana, crushed pineapple, and toasted pecans, and covered in a silky cream cheese frosting. A true Southern classic with Caribbean roots.
      Prep Time20 minutes mins
      Cook Time25 minutes mins
      Cooling Time10 minutes mins
      Total Time55 minutes mins
      Course: Dessert
      Cuisine: American, Jamaican
      Keyword: hummingbird cake, hummingbird cake recipe
      Servings: 16 people
      Calories: 601kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Equipment

      • 3 9-inch Cake Pans

      Ingredients

      For the Cake

      • 1 ½ cups chopped pecans divided (174g)
      • 2 cups unbleached all-purpose flour sifted (280g)
      • 1 cup white granulated sugar 210g
      • ¾ cup light brown sugar 140g
      • 1 ½ teaspoon baking soda 8g
      • 1 teaspoon table salt 5g
      • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon 2g
      • ½ teaspoon allspice 1g
      • 3 large eggs 149g
      • 1 cup vegetable oil 210g
      • 2 teaspoon vanilla extract 7g
      • 8 oz can crushed pineapple do not drain (227g)
      • 2 cups mashed bananas about 4–5 medium ripe bananas (500g)

      For the Cream Cheese Frosting

      • 12 oz cream cheese at room temperature (331g)
      • ¾ cup unsalted butter at room temperature (165g)
      • 2 ¼ cups powdered sugar sifted (300g)
      • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract 2g
      • 2 tablespoon milk 26g

      Instructions

      For the Cake

      • Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C). Grease and flour three 9-inch round cake pans or line them with parchment paper.
      • Spread the chopped pecans on a baking sheet and toast in the oven for 5–7 minutes until fragrant. Remove and let cool.
      • In a medium bowl, whisk together the flour, baking soda, salt, cinnamon, and allspice.
      • In a large bowl, whisk the eggs, vegetable oil, granulated sugar, brown sugar, and vanilla extract until well combined.
      • Gradually add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients, stirring until just combined.
      • Fold in the crushed pineapple with its juice, mashed bananas, and 1 cup of the toasted pecans.
      • Divide the batter evenly among the three prepared cake pans.
      • Bake for 25–30 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.
      • Cool in the pans for 10 minutes, then transfer to a wire rack to cool completely.

      For the Frosting

      • Beat the cream cheese and butter together until smooth and creamy. Gradually add the sifted powdered sugar one cup at a time, mixing well after each addition. Stir in the vanilla extract and milk.
      • Spread a generous layer of frosting between each cake layer, then frost the top and sides of the cake. Sprinkle remaining ½ cup toasted pecans on top.

      Video

      Notes

      • For better slicing, refrigerate for at least 30 minutes before serving to allow the frosting to set. However, your cake will still turn out fine if you skip this step. Who has space to store a whole cake in the fridge anyway?
      • Do not drain the crushed pineapple — the juice is essential for keeping the cake moist.
      • Use very ripe bananas (heavily speckled or mostly brown) for the best flavor and texture.
      • The cake layers must be completely cool before frosting, or the cream cheese frosting will not hold.
      • Store covered in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. The cake slices can be frozen for up to 2 months.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 601kcal | Carbohydrates: 63g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 11g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 75mg | Sodium: 187mg | Potassium: 238mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 631IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 54mg | Iron: 1mg

      Picadillo (Cuban Style)

      February 16, 2026 by Tanya Harris 4 Comments

      Cuban picadillo and black bowl with gold spoon sticking out and olives on the side

      This picadillo is one of my favorite ground beef recipes. This Cuban-style version is the kind of meal you can make on a busy night and then look forward to leftovers the rest of the week.

      Cuban picadillo and black bowl with gold spoon sticking out and olives on the side

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      Tanya holding a plate of Picadillo and looking at the camera, smiling.

      There's a local restaurant near me that serves the most amazing picadillo. They stuff it into empanadas, and while those are fantastic, I always find myself ordering it over rice with a side of plantains. It's one of those meals I started craving at home, so I had to figure out my own version.

      This Cuban-inspired picadillo is a great weeknight dinner because it comes together in one skillet in about 30 minutes. But here's the thing I've learned from making it over and over: the flavors are at their best after the picadillo has rested overnight in the fridge and been reheated.

      So if you're into meal prep or like to have something ready to go for the week, this is a perfect recipe to keep in your rotation. It's got that Caribbean flavor I love, and it reheats like a dream.

      If you enjoy ground beef recipes, you'll also want to check out my Stuffed Bell Peppers.

      Love, Tanya

      Picadillo at a Glance

      • Prep Time: 10 minutes
      • Cook Time: 30-35 minutes
      • Total Time: 40-45 minutes
      • Serves: 6
      • Best For: Weeknight dinners, meal prep, weekly rotation

      A Quick Look at the Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Olive oil — For sautéing the aromatics and building flavor in the skillet. Feel free to use any high-heat cooking oil you prefer.
      • Aromatics — Yellow onion, green bell pepper, and garlic.
      • Lean ground beef - I prefer 85/15 for this recipe. You get enough fat for flavor, but it's not overly greasy. You can go leaner if you prefer, just know that the dish may be slightly less rich.
      • Spices — ground cumin, cinnamon, nutmeg, and crushed red pepper flakes—this is the spice combination that makes picadillo taste like picadillo.
      • Tomato paste — A small amount goes a long way. It adds a concentrated tomato flavor and helps build a rich sauce.
      • Diced tomatoes — I use a can of diced tomatoes, undrained, which provides the liquid base for the sauce without making things too soupy.
      • Dried cranberries — This is a twist on the traditional raisins that go into picadillo. Once I had dried cranberries in picadillo, I was hooked. The dried cranberries provide a sweet contrast to the salty, acidic olives and capers in the dish. If you aren't a fan of raisins or cranberries in your dish, simply leave them out.
      • Spanish green olives with pimientos and capers — Both of these bring a salty, briny punch that's essential to Cuban-style picadillo. Don't skip them.
      • Bay leaves — These simmer with the meat and add an herbal, slightly floral background note.
      • White vinegar — A splash at the end brightens up the whole dish and cuts through the richness of the beef. Feel free to use apple cider vinegar if that's what you have on hand.
      • Potato — I use a waxy potato like Yukon Gold or red potato, diced small. It cooks right in the skillet with everything else and adds a hearty element to the dish.
      • Beef broth — Just enough to help the potatoes cook through and create a saucy consistency.
      Ingredients for a picadillo on white countertop.

      How to Make Picadillo

      Step 1: Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the diced onion and green bell pepper and sauté for 5 to 7 minutes until they've softened. Add the garlic and cook for another 20 to 30 seconds until fragrant.

      Step 2: Add the ground beef to the skillet, breaking it up with a wooden spoon as it cooks. Let it brown for 6 to 8 minutes, breaking it into small crumbles. Once browned, stir in the cumin, cinnamon, nutmeg, crushed red pepper, salt, and black pepper. Cook for about 30 seconds to toast the spices. Then add the tomato paste and stir to coat the meat, cooking for another 30 seconds.

      ground beef, yellow onion, and green bell peppers cooking in skillet

      Step 3: Add the diced tomatoes (with their juices), diced potato, cranberries, sliced olives, capers, beef broth, and bay leaves. Stir everything together, then reduce the heat to medium-low. Cover and let the picadillo simmer for 20 to 25 minutes until the potatoes are tender. If the sauce looks too thin toward the end, remove the lid for the last 5 minutes to let it thicken up a bit.

      Picadillo in skillet before stewing down
      Picadillo and skillet after stewing down

      Step 4: Remove the bay leaves and stir in the vinegar. Taste and adjust the seasoning as needed. Serve and enjoy.

      hand holding a plate with Picadillo, white rice, and plantains on the plate

      Variations

      You can make this picadillo your own with a few easy swaps.

      • Ground turkey or chicken: Swap the ground beef for ground turkey or chicken for a lighter version. The spices and olives still carry the flavor.
      • Traditional raisins: If you prefer the classic version, use raisins in place of the dried cranberries.
      • No potatoes: Some versions of picadillo skip the potato altogether. If you leave it out, you may want to reduce the beef broth to about a quarter cup.
      • Sweet plantains on the side: This is a popular way to serve picadillo in Cuban cuisine. The sweetness of the plantains pairs so well with the savory, briny meat. Try it with my Air-Fried Sweet Plantains.

      Serving Suggestions

      Picadillo is incredibly versatile when it comes to serving. My favorite way is to spoon it over a bed of rice, which is how I always order it at my local spot. Here are a few ways to serve it:

      • Over rice is the most traditional and my personal favorite. Try it with my Yellow Rice or Coconut Rice for something a little different.
      • Stuffed into empanadas or hand pies for a grab-and-go option.
      • Scooped into taco shells or tortillas with your favorite toppings.
      • Alongside plantains and a simple salad.
      • As a filling for Stuffed Bell Peppers.
      A close photo of Cuban Picadillo with a spoon inside the Picadillo.

      Make Ahead and Storage

      • Storage: Store leftover picadillo in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. As I mentioned, this dish actually tastes better the next day after the flavors have had time to develop overnight.
      • Freezing: Picadillo freezes well for up to 3 months. Let it cool completely before transferring to a freezer-safe container. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before reheating.
      • Reheating: Reheat on the stovetop over medium-low heat, stirring occasionally. Add a splash of beef broth if it needs a little extra moisture.

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • Break the ground beef into small crumbles as it browns. Smaller pieces mean more surface area for the spices and sauce to cling to, which gives you better flavor in every bite.
      • Don't skip the vinegar at the end. That splash of acidity brightens the entire dish and balances out the richness of the beef and the brininess of the olives and capers.
      • Cut the potatoes into small, even cubes so they cook through in the same time as the rest of the dish. If the pieces are too large, they'll still be firm when everything else is done.
      Tanya holding a plate of Picadillo and looking at the camera, smiling.

      Related Recipes

      I hope you love this picadillo recipe as much as we do. If you're looking for more comforting ground beef or Caribbean-inspired recipes, try these out:

      • Caribbean Dirty Rice— My Caribbean spin on classic Southern dirty rice.
      • Jamaican Oxtail — Rich, tender, and saucy oxtails braised to perfection.
      • Brown Stew Chicken — A flavorful Jamaican stew with a rich, savory gravy.
      • Easy Yellow Rice — The perfect simple side to serve alongside this picadillo.

      If you make this picadillo recipe, please let me know how you like it by leaving a review below. Your feedback is appreciated!

      Cuban picadillo and black bowl with gold spoon sticking out and olives on the side
      Print Recipe
      5 from 2 votes

      Picadillo Recipe

      This Cuban-inspired picadillo is a flavorful ground beef skillet dish made with warm spices, briny olives, capers, dried cranberries, and tender potatoes. Perfect served over rice for a comforting weeknight dinner.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time30 minutes mins
      Total Time40 minutes mins
      Course: entree
      Cuisine: Caribbean
      Keyword: picadillo, picadillo recipe
      Servings: 6 people
      Calories: 280kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 2 tablespoons olive oil
      • 1 cup yellow onion diced
      • 1 cup green bell pepper diced
      • 4 to 6 cloves garlic minced
      • 1½ pounds lean ground beef 85/15 preferred
      • 2 teaspoons ground cumin
      • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
      • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
      • ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper flakes
      • 1 teaspoon salt
      • ½ teaspoon black pepper
      • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
      • 14.5 ounce can diced tomatoes, undrained
      • ¼ cup dried cranberries
      • ⅓ cup Spanish green olives with pimientos sliced
      • 2 tablespoons capers
      • 1 large waxy potato such as Yukon Gold or red, about 8 ounces, cut into ¼-inch cubes
      • ½ cup beef broth
      • 2 bay leaves
      • 1 tablespoon white vinegar or apple cider vinegar

      Instructions

      • Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the diced onion and green bell pepper. Sauté for 5 to 7 minutes until softened.
      • Add garlic and cook for an additional 20 to 30 seconds, until fragrant.
      • Add the ground beef, breaking it up with a wooden spoon. Cook for 6 to 8 minutes until browned, breaking it into small crumbles.
      • Stir in the cumin, cinnamon, nutmeg, crushed red pepper, salt, and black pepper. Cook and stir for about 30 seconds to toast the spices.
      • Add the tomato paste and stir to coat the meat. Cook for about 30 seconds.
      • Add the diced tomatoes (with juices), diced potato, cranberries, sliced olives, capers, beef broth, and bay leaves. Stir to combine.
      • Reduce heat to medium-low, cover, and simmer for 20 to 25 minutes, until potatoes are tender. If the sauce seems too thin, uncover for the last 5 minutes to thicken slightly.
      • Remove bay leaves and stir in vinegar. Taste and adjust seasoning as needed. Serve and enjoy.

      Video

      Notes

      • This picadillo tastes even better the next day after the flavors have had time to meld. Make it ahead for meal prep or weeknight dinners.
      • Substitute dried cranberries with raisins for a more traditional version.
      • Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days or freeze for up to 3 months.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 280kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 70mg | Sodium: 777mg | Potassium: 721mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 245IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 45mg | Iron: 4mg

      Spinach Artichoke Dip

      February 13, 2026 by Tanya Harris Leave a Comment

      Spinach artichoke dip in skillet with tortilla chips on the side.

      This spinach artichoke dip recipe is hot, cheesy, and the first thing to go at any party. Three kinds of cheese, just the right amount of spinach and artichoke, and it comes out bubbly and golden every time.

      Spinach artichoke dip in skillet with tortilla chips on the side.

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      pic of Tanya

      The key to the best spinach artichoke dip is the ratio. If there's too much, then the whole thing tastes like a block of spinach. I use three cheeses here, mozzarella, Monterey Jack, and Parmesan, and it also makes all the difference.

      If you're building out a dip spread, my Beer Cheese Dip for Pretzels or my queso dip.

      Love, Tanya

      Spinach Artichoke Dip At a Glance

      • Prep Time: 10 minutes
      • Cook Time: 25–30 minutes
      • Total Time: 35–40 minutes
      • Serves: 10
      • Best For: parties, holiday gatherings, appetizer spreads

      A Quick Look at the Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Cream cheese — The base of the dip. Make sure it's fully softened to room temperature before you start mixing, or you'll end up with lumps.
      • Sour cream — Adds a gentle tang and helps soften the cream cheese so the dip isn't too dense.
      • Mayonnaise — Works alongside the sour cream to keep things creamy and rich. Full-fat mayo gives you the best results.
      • Cheese - All shredded and grated, I use Parmesan, mozzarella, and Monterey Jack cheese.
      • Frozen spinach, thawed and squeezed dry — I prefer frozen over fresh here because it's already cooked down, so you get a consistent amount every time. The key is squeezing out every bit of water — more on that below.
      • Canned artichoke hearts, drained and chopped — Quartered artichoke hearts work great. Drain them well and chop them into smaller pieces so they distribute evenly throughout the dip.
      • Seasonings - Garlic powder, salt, black pepper, red pepper flakes
      • Cooking spray - so the dip doesn't stick to the pan.
      ingredients for spinach artichoke dip on table in bowls

      How to Make Spinach Artichoke Dip

      Step 1: Preheat your oven to 350°F. Spray a cast-iron skillet or an 8x8 baking dish with cooking spray, then set aside.

      Step 2: Mix the base. In a large bowl, stir together the cream cheese, sour cream, and mayonnaise until smooth and well combined.

      Step 3: Add the cheeses and seasoning. Stir in the Parmesan, three-quarters of the mozzarella, all of the Monterey Jack, garlic powder, salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes. Mix until everything is evenly combined.

      cheeses mixed in yellow bowl
      cheeses mixed in yellow bowl

      Step 4: Fold in the spinach and artichokes. Add the squeezed-dry spinach and chopped artichoke hearts. Fold everything together until evenly distributed.

      miced cheeses and spinach and artichoke in bowl on spoon

      Step 5: Transfer and top. Spread the dip mixture into your prepared skillet or baking dish. Scatter the remaining quarter cup of mozzarella on top.

      Step 6: Bake. Bake for 25–30 minutes, until the dip is bubbling around the edges and the top is golden. Rest for a couple of minutes, then serve warm, straight from the skillet.

      spinach dip in cast iron skillet before baking
      Spinach artichoke dip in skillet with tortilla chips on the side.

      Variations

      • Slow cooker version: Mix everything together and cook on low for 2–3 hours, stirring once halfway through. The top won't get golden and crispy, but it's a great hands-off option for parties.
      • Fresh spinach: You can use fresh spinach instead of frozen. Cook it down in a skillet first, then let it cool and squeeze it as dry as possible before adding to the dip.
      • Add some heat: Stir in a tablespoon of diced jalapeños or a dash of hot sauce to kick things up.
      • Make it lighter: Swap the mayonnaise for Greek yogurt and use reduced-fat cream cheese. The texture will be slightly different but still very good.
      • Add protein: Stir in shredded rotisserie chicken to make this a heartier dip.
      Chip picking up spinach artichoke dip

      Make Ahead and Storage

      Make ahead: You can assemble this dip up to 24 hours in advance and keep it covered in the refrigerator unbaked. When you're ready to serve, bake it straight from the fridge and add 5–10 minutes to the baking time.

      Storage: Leftover dip keeps well in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. You could also freeze the dip. Assemble it, cover tightly, and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before baking as directed.

      Reheating: Reheat in the oven at 350°F for 10–15 minutes until warmed through and bubbling again. You can also microwave individual portions, though the oven gives you a better texture.

      spinach artichoke dip in a cast iron skillet with chips on the side

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • Soften the cream cheese completely. Cold cream cheese won't mix smoothly. Leave it on the counter for 30–60 minutes before you start, or microwave it in 10-second intervals until it's soft but not melted.
      • Cast iron holds heat well. Baking in a cast-iron skillet keeps the dip warm longer on the table. If you don't have one, a regular baking dish works just fine.
      • Don't overbake. Pull it out when it's bubbling and the cheese on top is golden. Overbaking dries it out.

      FAQs

      Can I make it ahead of time?

      Yes. Assemble the dip up to 24 hours in advance, cover, and refrigerate. Bake it when you're ready to serve. Add a few extra minutes to the baking time since it's going in cold.

      What can I serve with this dip?

      Tortilla chips, toasted baguette slices, pita chips, pretzels, crackers, or raw vegetables. Any sturdy dipper works. Avoid anything too thin or flimsy that will break when you scoop.

      I hope you love this spinach artichoke dip as much as we do. If you're looking for more dip and appetizer recipes, try these out:

      • Beer Cheese Dip for Pretzels — A quick, creamy beer cheese dip made for dunking soft pretzels.
      • Easy Queso Dip — Smooth, cheesy, and perfect with tortilla chips.
      • Slow Cooker Cheesy Hot Shrimp Dip — Creamy, cheesy shrimp dip that comes together in the slow cooker.
      • Air Fryer Pretzel Bites — Soft, pillowy pretzel bites that are the perfect companion for any dip.
      Spinach artichoke dip in skillet with tortilla chips on the side.
      Print Recipe
      No ratings yet

      Spinach Artichoke Dip Recipe

      This baked spinach artichoke dip is rich, creamy, and loaded with three cheeses.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time25 minutes mins
      Total Time35 minutes mins
      Course: Appetizer
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: hot spinach artichoke dip, spinach artichoke dip
      Servings: 10
      Calories: 316kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 8 oz cream cheese softened
      • ½ cup sour cream
      • ½ cup mayonnaise
      • ¾ cup freshly grated Parmesan cheese
      • 1 cup shredded mozzarella cheese divided (¾ cup mixed in, ¼ cup for topping)
      • ½ cup shredded Monterey Jack cheese
      • 8 oz frozen spinach thawed and thoroughly squeezed dry
      • 14 oz can artichoke hearts drained and chopped
      • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
      • ½ teaspoon table salt
      • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
      • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes
      • cooking spray

      Instructions

      • Spray a cast-iron skillet or an 8x8 baking dish with cooking spray, then set aside.
      • In a large bowl, mix cream cheese, sour cream, and mayonnaise together until smooth.
      • Stir in Parmesan, ¾ cup mozzarella, Monterey Jack, garlic powder, salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes.
      • Fold in the spinach and artichokes until well combined.
      • Transfer to the prepared skillet or baking dish. Top with the remaining ¼ cup mozzarella.
      • Bake for 25–30 minutes until bubbly and golden on top. Serve warm.

      Notes

      • Squeeze the spinach completely dry using a clean kitchen towel or several layers of paper towels. Excess moisture will make the dip watery.
      • Make sure the cream cheese is fully softened to room temperature before mixing to avoid lumps.
      • Can be assembled up to 24 hours ahead and refrigerated unbaked. Add 5–10 minutes to the baking time if going straight from the fridge.
      • Leftovers can be kept in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat at 350°F for 10–15 minutes.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 316kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 55mg | Sodium: 550mg | Potassium: 157mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 3639IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 237mg | Iron: 1mg

      Easy and Fluffy Coconut Rice Recipe

      February 11, 2026 by Tanya Harris 4 Comments

      coconut rice in bowl with spoon

      This coconut rice recipe is fragrant, fluffy, and has the most beautiful coconut flavor. Made with jasmine rice and coconut milk, it's one of the easiest and most delicious rice recipes you can make.

      coconut rice in bowl with spoon

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      pic of Tanya

      If you've ever had my Jamaican Rice and Peas, you know I love cooking rice in coconut milk. That recipe is a staple in my house and one of the most popular on the blog. But sometimes you want the same creamy coconut flavor without the kidney beans and all the extra seasonings. I like to call this the cousin of rice and peas.

      This rice comes out fluffy, with the grains separated and not gluey or mushy. This rice goes best when serving dishes with bold, saucy flavors, like curry chicken or even my chipotle chicken. It's one of those rice recipes that makes the entire plate feel more complete but special.

      Love, Tanya

      Coconut Rice at a Glance

      • Prep Time: 5 minutes
      • Cook Time: 20 minutes
      • Rest Time: 5 minutes
      • Total Time: 30 minutes
      • Serves: 4-6
      • Best For: Weeknight dinners, Caribbean dishes, Asian dishes, meal prep

      A Quick Look at The Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Jasmine rice – Jasmine rice is my go-to for this coconut rice recipe because it's naturally aromatic and cooks up fluffy every time. You could also use basmati rice or another long-grain white rice, but Jasmine gives you the best texture and flavor with the coconut milk. Brown rice can be used, but you'll need to increase the water and the cook time. Brown rice typically takes 40-45 minutes to cook and requires about an extra half cup of water. The coconut flavor will be milder since brown rice has a nuttier taste on its own.
      • Full-fat coconut milk – Use one can of full-fat canned coconut milk. This is where all of the coconut flavor comes from. Give the can a good shake before opening since the cream and liquid tend to separate. I like to stir the coconut milk well before adding it to the pot.
      • Water – One cup of water added alongside the coconut milk helps the rice cook evenly without becoming too heavy or sticky. The ratio of coconut milk to water is what keeps this rice fluffy rather than dense.
      • Kosher salt – I use 2½ teaspoons, which seasons the rice properly all the way through. If you're using table salt, reduce it to about 2 teaspoons.
      • Bay leaf and cinnamon stick – These sit on top of the rice while it cooks and add a subtle flavor. You'll remove them before serving. They're a nod to how rice and peas are seasoned in Jamaican cooking, and some aromatics on top.
      • Fresh lime juice – A squeeze of lime right before serving brightens the coconut rice and keeps the flavors from feeling one-note.
      coconut rice ingredients

      How to Make Coconut Rice

      This is a simple stovetop coconut rice recipe that comes together in about 30 minutes with almost no hands-on work. The key is low heat and leaving the lid on while the rice cooks.

      Step 1: Rinse the jasmine rice thoroughly under cold water until the water runs clear. This removes excess starch and prevents the cooked rice from turning sticky or gummy.

      Step 2: Add the rinsed rice, kosher salt, full-fat coconut milk, and water to a medium-sized pot. Stir to combine. Place the bay leaf and cinnamon stick on top of the rice mixture.

      coconut rice ingredients in pot before cooking

      Step 3: Bring the mixture to a gentle boil over medium heat. Once it starts bubbling, reduce the heat to low, cover the pot with a tight-fitting lid, and let it simmer for 20 minutes. Do not lift the lid during this time.

      Step 4: Remove the pot from the heat and let it sit, still covered, for an additional 5 minutes. This allows the rice to finish steaming and absorb any remaining liquid.

      coconut rice in pot after cooking

      Step 5: Remove the bay leaf and cinnamon stick, fluff the rice with a fork, and squeeze fresh lime juice over the top before serving.

      coconut rice fluffed with fork with hand holding the bowl

      How to Cook Coconut Rice in a Rice Cooker

      Add the rinsed jasmine rice, full-fat canned coconut milk, water, and salt to your rice cooker. Place the bay leaf and cinnamon stick on top. Set the rice cooker to the white rice or Jasmine rice setting and let it do the work. Once the rice cooker switches to warm, let the rice sit for 5 minutes before removing the bay leaf and cinnamon stick. Fluff with a fork and finish with lime juice.

      You could also bake this rice in the oven as well.

      Serving Suggestions

      Coconut rice pairs well with anything that has bold, saucy, or spicy flavors. The subtle coconut flavor rounds out the plate without competing with the main dish.

      Some of my favorites to serve alongside this rice:

      • Jamaican Oxtail – The rich gravy over this fluffy coconut rice is everything.
      • Braised Beef Shanks - For a showstopping pairing, serve this coconut rice alongside my fall-off-the-bone Braised Beef Shanks. The rich, savory gravy soaks into every grain.
      • Jamaican Jerk Chicken – The subtle sweetness of coconut balances the heat from the jerk seasoning.
      • Easy Oven-Baked Fish – A lighter option that still pairs well with the coconut flavor.
      • Picadillo - A ground beef dish simmered in a savory tomato sauce that goes well with this rice.
      coconut rice in pot after cooking

      Make Ahead and Storage

      • Storage: Let the cooked rice cool completely, then store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. The texture may firm up a bit in the fridge, which is normal.
      • Freezing: This coconut rice freezes well. Portion it into freezer-safe bags or containers and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge before reheating.
      • Reheating: Add a splash of water to the rice and reheat in the microwave or on the stovetop over low heat. The extra moisture helps restore the fluffy texture.

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • Rinse the rice until the water runs clear. This removes the surface starch and prevents the cooked rice from turning sticky or gummy. With coconut milk already making the rice richer, you want each grain to stay distinct and fluffy.
      • Use full-fat canned coconut milk. Light coconut milk doesn't have enough coconut flavor or richness to make a difference. The full-fat version is what gives this coconut rice its creamy taste. Full-fat coconut milk without thickeners or stabilizers may leave a thin film on top after steaming. Simply fluff the rice to bring it back together.
      • Squeeze the lime juice right before serving. The acid brightens the coconut rice. Feel free to leave it out.
      coconut rice on black bowl with spoon

      I hope you love this coconut rice recipe as much as we do. If you're looking for more rice recipes and side dishes, try these out:

      • Jamaican Rice and Peas – The classic Jamaican coconut milk rice with kidney beans and all the seasonings.
      • Easy Yellow Rice – A vibrant, turmeric-seasoned rice that works as a side for almost anything.
      • Oven Baked Rice – A hands-off method for perfectly cooked rice every time.
      • Cilantro Lime Rice – Bright and fresh, this rice is perfect for bowls and Latin-inspired dishes.
      • Jollof Rice - a West African rice made with a flavorful tomato base, known for it's red color.
      coconut rice in bowl with spoon
      Print Recipe
      5 from 1 vote

      Coconut Rice Recipe

      This coconut rice recipe is fragrant, fluffy, and full of coconut flavor. Made with jasmine rice, full-fat canned coconut milk, and a touch of cinnamon, it's the easiest and most delicious side dish.
      Prep Time5 minutes mins
      Cook Time20 minutes mins
      5 minutes mins
      Total Time30 minutes mins
      Course: Side Dish
      Cuisine: Caribbean
      Keyword: coconut rice
      Servings: 6
      Calories: 227kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 2 cups jasmine rice rinsed until water runs clear
      • 1 13.5-oz can full-fat coconut milk, shaken and stirred
      • 1 cup water
      • 2½ teaspoons kosher salt
      • 1 bay leaf
      • 1 cinnamon stick
      • 1 squeeze fresh lime juice optional

      Instructions

      • Rinse the jasmine rice thoroughly under cold water until the water runs clear.
      • Add the rinsed rice, kosher salt, coconut milk, and water to a medium-sized pot. Stir to combine.
      • Place the bay leaf and cinnamon stick on top of the rice mixture.
      • Bring the mixture to a gentle boil over medium-high heat.
      • Reduce the heat to low, cover the pot with a tight-fitting lid, and let it simmer for 20 minutes.
      • Remove the pot from the heat and let it sit, covered, for an additional 5 minutes.
      • Discard the bay leaf and cinnamon stick. Fluff the rice with a fork and squeeze fresh lime juice over the top before serving.

      Video

      Notes

      • If using table salt instead of kosher salt, reduce the amount to about 2 teaspoons.
      • This coconut rice can also be made in a rice cooker using the white rice setting.
      • Leftover cooked rice stores well in the fridge for up to 4 days and freezes for up to 2 months.
      • Full-fat coconut milk without thickeners or stabilizers may leave a thin film on top after steaming. Simply fluff the rice to bring it back together.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 227kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 974mg | Potassium: 74mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 3IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

      Air Fryer Cauliflower Wings

      February 6, 2026 by Tanya Harris 10 Comments

      crispy breaded air fryer cauliflower wings coated in wing sauce

      If you love wings, you'll love my Air Fryer Cauliflower Wings, doused in a seasoned wet batter and coated in panko bread crumbs before being air fried to crisp perfection. Then pour over your favorite wing sauce and enjoy.

      crispy breaded air fryer cauliflower wings coated in wing sauce

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      pic of Tanya

      I am always looking for new and interesting ways to get more veggies into my family's diets. These air fryer cauliflower wings with buffalo sauce have become a real hit and make a regular appearance on the dinner table.

      Air-fryer cauliflower wings with panko breadcrumbs are easy to make and take only 10 minutes to prepare. You can coat them in sauce, or serve the sauce in a bowl alongside. It's all down to personal taste and how crispy you like your wings - it's a split in my house.

      If you would rather make these in an oven, check out my oven-baked cauliflower wings.

      Love, Tanya

      Air Fryer Cauliflower Wings at a Glance

      • Prep Time: 10 minutes
      • Cook Time: 17 minutes
      • Total Time: 27 minutes
      • Serves: 4
      • Best For: Game day snacks, easy appetizers, meatless dinners, and party platters

      Ingredients You Need

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      air fryer cauliflower wings ingredients set into individual bowls
      • Head of cauliflower: look for a fresh head with no brown spots.
      • Wet Batter: all-purpose flour, garlic powder, kosher salt, onion powder, paprika, ground black pepper, and almond milk.
      • Panko bread crumbs: these give the wings an extra crunch! This is quite important if you want to keep these wings crispy and serve them with dipping sauce on the side.
      • Wing sauce: feel free to use any wing sauce you like. My favorite is my spicy buffalo sauce.

      How to make Air Fryer Cauliflower Wings

      bowl filled with seasoned flour
      bowl filled with air fryer cauliflower wings batter

      Step 1: Preheat the air fryer to 350 degrees Fahrenheit (180°C). 

      Step 2: Mix all-purpose flour, garlic powder, kosher salt, onion powder, paprika, and black pepper in a large bowl. Slowly whisk in almond milk until you get a loose but slightly thick batter. 

      Place panko breadcrumbs in a separate dish. 

      cauliflower florets being coated in bowl of batter and separate bowl of panko breadcrumbs

      Step 3: Place the cauliflower florets in the wet batter, coating all sides, then shake off any excess. Then place the florets into the panko breadcrumbs, ensuring all sides are coated. 

      uncooked, breaded cauliflower florets in air fryer basket

      Step 4: Place the breaded florets into the preheated air fryer basket in a single layer. You will not be able to fit all the florets at once; you will need to cook them in batches. 

      air fryer basket filled with cooked cauliflower wings

      Step 5: Air-fry at 350 degrees Fahrenheit (180°C) for 15-17 minutes, flipping halfway through, until golden. Repeat steps 4-6 with the remaining florets.  

      Step 6: Remove florets and serve as is, or toss in your favorite wing sauce.

      Tanya's Top Tips

      These tips will help you make the best air-fryer cauliflower wings you've ever had. 

      • For the best results, always preheat your air fryer so it's hot and ready to go.
      • Take time to knock off any excess batter when coating the cauliflower; otherwise, it can become soggy.
      • The cauliflower wings will be crispy when removed from the air fryer. Once tossed in the sauce, they will lose their crispiness. If you prefer crispy wings, use the sauce for dipping rather than tossing them.

      crispy breaded air fryer cauliflower wings with wing sauce being poured over

      How to serve Air Fryer Cauliflower Wings

      This recipe serves 4 as an appetizer with your favorite wing sauce or dip. Try my Easy Queso Dip, or my BBQ Black-Eyed Pea Dip which would be a treat with these tasty bites.

      If you enjoy cauliflower as much as I do, try my 3 Flavor Cauliflower Wings that are baked in the oven.

      How to store 

      To refrigerate: If storing leftover cauliflower wings, I recommend storing them without the wing sauce poured over, as they will become soggy once stored.

      Instead, place the fried cauliflower wings in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. When ready to eat, reheat them in the air fryer at 350°F (180°C) for 3–5 minutes, or until heated through and crispy again.

      Make ahead: You can prepare the cauliflower and the batter ahead of time, then store them separately in the refrigerator until you are ready to start cooking. I do not recommend coating the cauliflower in the batter and panko bread crumb mixture before this, as the panko will become soggy if left to sit.

      crispy breaded air fryer cauliflower wings coated in wing sauce

      FAQs

      How to make crispy cauliflower wings?

      The trick is to get the air fryer nice and hot. I cook the cauliflower at 350 degrees Fahrenheit. Then work in batches to cook the cauliflower in a single layer. This ensures that the cauliflower becomes crispy. Do not be tempted to load up the air fryer basket or you will steam the cauliflower, and it will become mushy.

      Why are my cauliflower wings soggy?

      Cauliflower wings can become soggy if you coat them it too much batter or pour over too much sauce once they are cooked. If you prefer super crispy cauliflower wings, don't pour over the sauce. Serve the sauce in a separate dipping bowl.

      If you have tried this Air Fryer Cauliflower Wings recipe, or any other recipe on my blog, then please rate it and let me know how it turned out in the comments below!

      crispy breaded air fryer cauliflower wings coated in wing sauce
      Print Recipe
      4.67 from 3 votes

      Air Fryer Cauliflower Wings

      Air fryer cauliflower wings, coated in a spicy batter and panko bread crumbs before being fried and then coated in your favorite wing sauce.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time17 minutes mins
      Total Time27 minutes mins
      Course: Appetizer, Snack
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: air fryer cauliflower wings, air fryer cauliflower wings buffalo, air fryer cauliflower wings panko
      Servings: 4
      Calories: 284kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Equipment

      • 1 Air Fryer

      Ingredients

      • 1 medium head of cauliflower broken into florets - about 4-5 cups
      • 1 cup all purpose flour
      • 1 ½ teaspoon garlic powder
      • 1 ½ teaspoon kosher salt
      • 1 teaspoon onion powder
      • 1 teaspoon paprika
      • ½ teaspoon black pepper
      • 1 cup almond milk
      • 2 cups panko bread crumbs
      • 2 cups of your favorite wing sauce

      Instructions

      • Preheat the air fryer to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
      • Mix all-purpose flour, garlic powder, kosher salt, onion powder, paprika, and black pepper in a large bowl. Slowly whisk in milk, until you get a loose but slightly thick batter.
      • Place panko breadcrumbs in a separate dish.
      • Place the cauliflower florets in the wet batter, coating all sides and shaking off any excess. Then place the florets into the panko breadcrumbs, making sure all sides are coated.
      • Place the breaded florets into the preheated air fryer basket in a single layer. You will not be able to fit all the florets at this time; you will need to cook these in batches.
      • Air fry at 350 degrees Fahrenheit for 15-17 minutes, until golden, flipping halfway through. Repeat steps 4-6 with the with the remaining florets.
      • Remove florets and serve as is, or toss in your favorite wing sauce.

      Notes

      • The cauliflower wings will be crispy when removed from the air fryer. Once tossed in sauce, they will lose their crispiness. If you prefer crispy wings, use the sauce as a dipping sauce rather than tossing them.
      • Don't overcrowd your air fryer basket; you want to cook the florets in a single layer so that it fries rather than steams. So, work in batches depending on the size of your air fryer basket.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 284kcal | Carbohydrates: 54g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 4897mg | Potassium: 555mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 248IU | Vitamin C: 69mg | Calcium: 172mg | Iron: 4mg

      This post was originally published January 22, 2023. It has been updated with new information.

      Easy Mayonnaise Biscuits (5 Ingredients, Drop Biscuit Recipe)

      February 2, 2026 by Tanya Harris 20 Comments

      a basket of artfully arranged biscuits

      I learned classic biscuit‑making in a hands‑on class years ago, and this mayo biscuit version is my shortcut when I need biscuits fast without cutting in butter.

      mayonnaise biscuits in a bowl

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      pic of Tanya

      Living in the South has made me love a good ol’ biscuit, so much so that I even took a biscuit‑making class to learn how to make classic biscuits from scratch. When I have the time, I still love making those traditional biscuits, and I even make biscuits in the air fryer when I want to bake them fast.

      Now, when I want a quick biscuit with almost no effort, I use this mayonnaise biscuit recipe. The mayonnaise provides all the fat you need for tender, fluffy biscuits. They come together fast. Just mix the ingredients, drop the dough on the pan, and bake. I love having this as an option I think you will too.

      Love, Tanya

      Mayonnaise Biscuits at a Glance

      • Prep Time: 10 minutes
      • Cook Time: 12 minutes
      • Total Time: Under 30 minutes
      • Serves: About 10 biscuits
      • Best For: Quick weeknight sides, breakfast, or when you need biscuits fast without cutting in butter

      A Quick Look at the Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Self-rising flour – gives the biscuits lift without needing separate baking powder and salt.
      • Milk – whole milk is best for richness and tender texture.
      • Mayonnaise – the star ingredient; it replaces the butter and provides fat, moisture, and flavor. I prefer to use Duke’s mayo for these biscuits, but any brand of mayonnaise will work. 
      • Sugar – adds a touch of sweetness and helps with browning.
      • Salt – enhances all the flavors.
      ingredients for mayonnaise biscuits

      How to make mayonnaise biscuits

      Step 1: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit. 

      Step 2: Place all of the ingredients in a large bowl and mix just until combined.

      batter for mayonnaise biscuits in glass bowl

      Step 3: Use a large cookie scoop to drop the biscuits by spoonful onto a greased baking sheet.

      mayonnaise biscuits on sheetpan

      Step 4: Bake for 12 minutes or until golden brown. 

      baked mayonnaise biscuits on sheetpan

      Step 5: Remove and serve with your favorite toppings, such as butter or jam.

      jam spread on biscuits on plate with knife on side

      Tanya's Top Tips

      These biscuits can be altered to match your tastes and preferences. Here are some tips and tricks that will help make this easy biscuit recipe.   

      • You can put these drop biscuits into muffin cups instead of on a baking sheet.  
      • Brush the tops with melted butter to make them golden brown. 
      • If you don’t have self-rising flour, you can use all-purpose flour. If you use all-purpose flour, mix in 3 teaspoons of baking powder and ½ teaspoon of salt to it.

      What can I add to these biscuits? 

      Stir in some basic ingredients that will pump up your mayo biscuits. There are so many delicious options to choose from! Use these ideas to get started or choose your own.

      • Jalapenos
      • Cheese; goat cheese, fontina, parmesan cheese, cheddar
      • Green onions
      • Minced garlic or garlic powder
      • Herbs like parsley, thyme, sage, dill, rosemary
      • Bacon
      • Cinnamon sugar     
      biscuits stacked on top of each other

      Topping ideas  

      The best part about these particular biscuits is that you can top them with sweet or savory ingredients. Choose what you're in the mood for, and go for it!

      Here are some tasty options that you can try:

      • Jams and Jellies
      • Marmalade
      • Butter
      • Apple butter
      • Blueberry compote
      • Whipped cream 

      How to serve mayonnaise biscuits 

      Mayonnaise biscuits are a southern tradition served by themselves or paired with other simple ingredients.

      Cut them in half and make a classic sandwich with a fried egg, spinach, ham, asparagus, or sausage gravy.

      You can pair them with main courses like smothered pork chops, air fryer bone-in chicken breasts, or marinated air fryer salmon. 

      biscuits in bowl with jam on side

      How to store 

      Store: Keep leftover homemade biscuits in an airtight container or large freezer bag on the counter for three days or in the fridge for up to one week.

      Freeze: These mayonnaise rolls can easily be frozen to save for later. You can make a big batch and serve them with breakfast or dinner any day of the week.

      To freeze them, lay the biscuits in a single layer on a sheet pan, freeze them for 30 minutes, and then place them in a gallon-size bag back in the freezer.  

      I hope you love these biscuits as much as we do. If you have tried this or any other recipe on my blog, please rate it and let me know how it turned out in the comments below!

      a basket of artfully arranged biscuits
      Print Recipe
      4.45 from 18 votes

      Mayonnaise Biscuits

      Mayonnaise Biscuits are tender and fluffy, made with only five ingredients, and are ready to eat in just under 30 minutes.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Cook Time12 minutes mins
      Course: Side Dish
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: mayonnaise biscuits
      Servings: 10 biscuits
      Calories: 106kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 2 cups self-rising flour
      • 1 cup milk
      • 6 tablespoons Duke's mayonnaise
      • 1 teaspoon sugar
      • ⅛ teaspoon salt

      Instructions

      • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
      • Place all the ingredients in a large bowl and mix just until combined.
      • Use a large cookie scoop to drop the biscuits by spoonful onto a greased baking sheet.
      • Bake for 12 minutes or until golden brown.
      • Remove and serve with favorite toppings, like butter or jam.

      Video

      Notes

      • I prefer to use Duke’s mayo for these biscuits but any brand of mayonnaise should work.
      • If you don’t have self-rising flour, you can use all-purpose flour. If you use all-purpose flour, mix in 3 teaspoons of baking powder and ½ teaspoon of salt to it.

      Nutrition

      Serving: 10g | Calories: 106kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 39mg | Potassium: 62mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 40IU | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 0.2mg

      This post was originally published on August 16, 2022, and has been updated with new content and tips.

      Cajun Jambalaya Recipe (One-Pot)

      January 28, 2026 by Tanya Harris 3 Comments

      Jambalaya in pot

      I love this Cajun jambalaya for bringing bold Louisiana flavors to the table in one pot: smoky andouille sausage, tender chicken, and the classic "holy trinity" with perfectly seasoned rice.

      hands picking up jambalaya with spoon from pot

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      pic of Tanya

      Jambalaya is one of my absolute favorite rice dishes. There's something about the combination of the andouille sausage, tender chicken pieces, and perfectly seasoned rice. It took me a while to get this recipe just how I wanted it, but once I got it, oh my gosh, I couldn't stop making it this way.

      You'll find many jambalaya recipes that include tomatoes, but this one does not. This version is more commonly known as Cajun-style or "brown" jambalaya, and it's my preferred way to enjoy it. Without the tomatoes, I find that the flavors of the sausage and the chicken really come through.

      This rice also freezes wonderfully. It's perfect for meal prep, too. If you like Southern rice dishes, you gotta try my dirty rice.

      Love, Tanya

      JAMBALAYA AT A GLANCE

      • Prep Time: 20 minutes
      • Cook Time: 40 minutes
      • Total Time: 1 hour
      • Serves: 6
      • Best For: Weeknight dinners, feeding a crowd, meal prep, weekend cooking

      A QUICK LOOK AT THE INGREDIENTS

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Andouille sausage - I prefer Ragin' Cajun Andouille for its smoky, spicy flavor, which is essential to jambalaya. Use any andouille sausage you like.
      • Chicken thighs - Boneless, skinless thighs stay tender and juicy even with longer cooking times.
      • Onion, celery, bell pepper, and garlic - This classic Louisiana base builds the foundation of flavor. Don't skip the garlic either.
      • Parboiled rice - I use parboiled rice because it doesn't get mushy and holds up beautifully in one-pot dishes, staying firm and fluffy with grains that separate easily. Long-grain white rice works too, but it just won't be as sturdy and may be slightly mushy. It'll be fine if that's what you got, but for more separated grains, use the parboiled rice.
      • Cajun seasoning - Your favorite brand works. I like Dan-O's Cajun seasoning for this dish, or you can use a homemade Cajun seasoning blend.
      • Bay leaves, thyme, and cayenne - These add layers of aromatic depth and heat.
      • Chicken broth - Use good-quality broth.
      • Green onions and hot sauce - Mainly for garnish.
      ingredients for jambalaya

      Suggested Tool

      Mercer Culinary Enameled Cast Iron Round Dutch Oven, 6 qt., Matte Black
      Mercer Culinary Enameled Cast Iron Round Dutch Oven, 6 qt., Matte Black

      I suggest using a heavy-bottom pot with a tight-fitting lid when making this jambalaya on the stovetop. You will be browning a lot of meat, and a heavy pot distributes heat evenly to prevent burning and sticking while the lid traps steam to cook the rice properly.
      Buy Now

      HOW TO MAKE JAMBALAYA

      Step 1: Season chicken thighs with kosher salt and black pepper. Set aside. In a large Dutch oven or heavy pot over medium-high heat, brown the sausage slices until they develop some color and release their fat, about 5 minutes. Remove and set aside.

      Step 2: In the same pot, brown the chicken pieces in the sausage fat until lightly browned on all sides, about 5-7 minutes. Remove from the pot and then remove excess fat, leaving about 2-3 tablespoons in the pot.

      Sausage in cooking skillet
      Chicken cooking in pot

      Step 3: Add the diced onion, bell pepper, celery, and minced garlic to the pot along with about 2 tablespoons of the chicken broth. Scrape up any browned bits from the bottom of the pan with a wooden spoon as the vegetables cook. Cook until the vegetables soften and start to caramelize, about 8-10 minutes, lightly.

      Step 4: Stir in the rice, coating it with the vegetables and that flavorful fat. Add the Cajun seasoning, thyme, and cayenne pepper, stirring to distribute them through the rice evenly.

      Peppers and onion sautéing in pot
      Rice and seasonings in skillet

      Step 5: Pour in the remaining 3 cups of chicken broth. Return the browned sausage and chicken to the pot along with any accumulated juices. Stir everything well and nestle the bay leaves on top. Bring to a boil.

      ingredients for jambalaya in pot before steaming

      Step 6: Once boiling, reduce the heat to low, cover the pot tightly, and simmer for 22 minutes without lifting the lid.

      Step 7: After 22 minutes, remove the pot from the heat and let it stand, still covered, for 5 minutes. This resting time enables the rice to finish cooking with residual heat. Then, open the lid, remove the bay leaves, and fluff the rice with a fork.

      Step 8: Garnish with sliced green onions and serve with hot sauce on the side.

      Jambalaya in pot

      SERVING SUGGESTIONS

      Jambalaya is a complete meal on its own, but I love serving it with Classic Southern Cornbread or Easy Cornbread Muffins. A simple green salad or Southern Cucumber Salad on the side adds a fresh, crisp contrast to the rich, spicy rice.

      And don't forget the hot sauce. Louisiana-style hot sauce works well with this dish if you're a fan of some extra spice.

      MAKE AHEAD AND STORAGE

      • Storage: Store leftover jambalaya in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. The flavors actually meld and deepen overnight, so it tastes even better the next day.
      • Freezing: Jambalaya freezes beautifully. Let it cool completely, then transfer to freezer-safe containers or bags. It'll keep for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before reheating.
      • Reheating: Reheat on the stovetop over medium-low heat with a splash of chicken broth to loosen it up, or microwave individual portions with a damp paper towel on top to keep it from drying out.
      jambalaya in bowl

      TANYA'S TOP TIPS

      • Don't skip the browning - Browning the sausage and chicken creates fond (those stuck-on browned bits), which adds incredible depth of flavor to the whole dish. If the bottom of the pot is getting too dark, reduce the heat a bit. You don't want the fond to burn.
      • Keep the lid on - Once you cover the pot to simmer, do not lift the lid. Peeking releases steam and affects how evenly the rice cooks.
      • Let it rest - That 5-minute resting period after cooking is essential. It lets the rice finish absorbing any remaining liquid, making fluffing easier.

      A LITTLE HISTORY OF JAMBALAYA

      One thing I learned during my research is that jambalaya is influenced by Spanish paella. When I discovered that connection, I was overjoyed because I also love paella. In Louisiana, rice dishes, like Spanish paella, were adapted to local ingredients and blended with French and West African influences, and over time, jambalaya was born.

      Now, jambalaya comes in two main styles. Creole jambalaya (often called "red jambalaya") includes tomatoes and is what you'll find in New Orleans and other urban areas. Cajun jambalaya (often called "brown jambalaya") skips the tomatoes entirely and comes from the rural bayous and small towns of south Louisiana. This recipe is Cajun-style—no tomatoes, just deep, rich flavor from browning the meat and building layers of seasoning.

      RELATED RECIPES

      I hope you love this jambalaya recipe as much as we do. If you're looking for more one-pot meals and Southern comfort food, try these out:

      • One-Pot Jerk Chicken and Rice - Caribbean flavors in an easy one-pot meal
      • Ground Chicken and Rice - this is my creative take on a Caribbean version of dirty rice. It's fun and delicious.
      • Dirty rice - I use chicken livers in my recipe, as I find they give it a more authentic taste than the traditional dirty rice I am familiar with.
      • Gumbo - This classic Cajun Gumbo is made with chicken and andouille sausage. If you love a flavorful stew with a dark roux, you'll love this recipe.

      If you have tried this or any other recipe on my blog, please rate it and let me know how it turned out in the comments below!

      Jambalaya in pot
      Print Recipe
      4.50 from 2 votes

      Jambalaya Recipe

      This Cajun jambalaya brings bold Louisiana flavors to your table, with smoky andouille sausage, tender chicken thighs, and the classic holy trinity of vegetables, all in a perfectly seasoned one-pot rice dish.
      Prep Time20 minutes mins
      Cook Time40 minutes mins
      Total Time1 hour hr
      Course: entree
      Cuisine: American, Cajun
      Keyword: cajun jambalaya, jambalaya
      Servings: 6 people
      Calories: 766kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 1 ½ pounds boneless skinless chicken thighs, chopped into 1-inch cubes
      • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
      • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
      • 1 pound andouille sausage sliced into ½-inch rounds
      • 1 ½ cups diced yellow onion about 1 large onion
      • 1 cup diced green bell pepper 1 medium pepper
      • 1 cup diced celery about 2 stalks
      • 4 cloves garlic minced
      • 2 cups parboiled rice or long-grain white rice
      • 4 cups chicken broth divided
      • 2 tablespoons Cajun seasoning
      • 2 bay leaves
      • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
      • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper adjust to taste
      • ½ cup sliced green onions
      • Hot sauce to taste

      Instructions

      • Season chicken thighs with kosher salt and black pepper. Set aside. In a large Dutch oven or heavy pot over medium-high heat, brown the sausage slices until they develop color and release their fat, about 5 minutes. Remove and set aside.
      • In the same pot, brown the chicken pieces in the sausage fat until lightly browned on all sides, about 5-7 minutes. Remove and set aside with the sausage. Remove excess fat, leaving about 2-3 tablespoons in the pot.
      • Add the diced onion, bell pepper, celery, and minced garlic to the pot along with about 2 tablespoons of the chicken broth. Scrape up any browned bits from the bottom of the pan with a wooden spoon as the vegetables cook. Cook until the vegetables soften and start to caramelize, about 8-10 minutes, lightly.
      • Stir in rice, coating it with the vegetables. Add Cajun seasoning, thyme, and cayenne pepper.
      • Pour in the remaining chicken broth. Return sausage and chicken to the pot along with any accumulated juices. Stir well and top with bay leaves. Bring to a boil.
      • Once boiling, reduce the heat to low, cover tightly, and simmer for 22 minutes without lifting the lid.
      • Remove from heat and let stand, covered, for 5 minutes. Open the lid, remove bay leaves, and fluff with a fork.
      • Garnish with sliced green onions and serve with hot sauce on the side.

      Notes

      • This recipe uses parboiled rice because it doesn't get mushy and holds up well in one-pot dishes. Long-grain white rice works too, but it just won't be as firm and fluffy.
      • Jambalaya tastes even better the next day, as the flavors meld. Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 766kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 39g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 17g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 179mg | Sodium: 1694mg | Potassium: 827mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1602IU | Vitamin C: 26mg | Calcium: 77mg | Iron: 3mg

      Jamaican Pepper Steak

      January 26, 2026 by Tanya Harris 2 Comments

      Jamaican pepper steak in a bowl with a spoon lifting up some of the pepper steak.

      This Jamaican pepper steak is a quick stir-fry loaded with tender beef, sweet bell peppers, and warm island spices. It's the kind of weeknight dinner that comes together fast but tastes like you spent hours on it.

      Jamaican pepper steak in a bowl with a spoon lifting up some of the pepper steak.

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      tanya holding pepper steak

      Pepper steak is one of those dishes that reflects the Chinese influence in Jamaican cooking. The Jamaican version takes the stir-fry concept and adds scotch bonnet pepper, fresh thyme, allspice, and all-purpose seasoning. It's got that quick cooking method from Chinese cuisine, but the flavors are unmistakably Jamaican.

      I make this when I want something quick and full of flavor. It works for a regular weeknight, but it's also nice enough for a romantic dinner at home. Serve it over rice.

      Love, Tanya

      JAMAICAN PEPPER STEAK AT A GLANCE

      • Prep Time: 15 minutes
      • Cook Time: 20 minutes
      • Total Time: 35 minutes
      • Serves: 6 people
      • Best For: Quick weeknight dinners, romantic dinners, meal prep

      A QUICK LOOK AT THE INGREDIENTS

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      For the Beef

      • Top sirloin or flank steak - Cut into thin strips about ¼ inch thick, slicing against the grain for tenderness.
      • Soy sauce, all-purpose seasoning, ground allspice, and cornstarch - These season and coat the beef. The cornstarch also helps with velveting, keeping the meat tender, and thickening the sauce later.

      For the Sauce

      Beef broth, dark soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce, garlic powder, onion powder, black pepper, and cornstarch

      For the Stir-Fry

      Bell peppers, yellow onion, garlic, fresh ginger, scotch bonnet pepper, fresh thyme, olive oil, and green onions - I use red, yellow, and green peppers. Slice the peppers and onion about ¼ inch thick. You can go a little thinner, but keep them thicker than ⅛ inch. Slice the peppers about the same thickness as the beef. Slice the garlic, mince the ginger, and slice the scotch bonnet (remove seeds for less heat).

      ingredients for pepper steak on table

      HOW TO MAKE JAMAICAN PEPPER STEAK

      This recipe comes together quickly once you start cooking, so have everything prepped and ready to go before you turn on the heat.

      Step 1: Marinate the beef

      In a bowl, combine the sliced beef with all-purpose seasoning, allspice, soy sauce, and cornstarch. Mix until the beef is evenly coated. Let it marinate for 30 minutes while you prep your vegetables and make the sauce. This marinating time makes a real difference in flavor and texture.

      Step 2: Make the sauce

      In a bowl, whisk together the beef broth, dark soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce, garlic powder, onion powder, ground black pepper, and cornstarch. Set this aside until you need it later.

      Steak being marinated in a bowl.
      Sauce for pepper steak with whisk in bowl.

      Step 3: Sear the beef

      Heat 2 tablespoons of oil in a large skillet or wok over medium-high heat. Add the beef in batches to avoid overcrowding the pan. Sear for 2-3 minutes, until browned, flipping halfway through. Remove it from the pan and set aside.

      Step 4: Cook the vegetables

      In the same pan, add 2 tablespoons of oil if needed. Add the yellow onions and peppers and cook for 3-4 minutes, stirring until they've softened. Add the garlic, ginger, green onions, scotch bonnet, and thyme sprigs and stir for another minute.

      Steak pieces frying in a skillet.
      peppers being sauteed in pan

      Step 5: Bring it together

      Return the beef to the pan with the vegetables. Pour in the sauce you made earlier and stir everything together. Reduce the heat to medium and simmer for 2-3 minutes, until the sauce thickens.

      Close-up side image of Jamaican pepper steak in a bowl.

      Step 6: Finish and serve

      Remove from heat and serve hot over rice.

      VARIATIONS

      • Milder version - Skip the scotch bonnet entirely and use only bell peppers. You'll still get the Jamaican flavors from the thyme and allspice without the added heat.
      • Chicken pepper steak - Swap the beef for thinly sliced chicken breast or thighs. The cooking time stays about the same.
      • Extra vegetables - Add mushrooms, snap peas, or carrots to bulk it up.
      • Spicier version - Keep the seeds in the scotch bonnet, or add a second pepper. Or use a scotch bonnet pepper sauce.

      SERVING SUGGESTIONS

      Serve this pepper steak over white rice, brown rice, or my Jamaican rice and peas for a complete meal. Fried plantains make a sweet contrast to the savory stir-fry. You could also pair it with Jamaican cabbage for a lighter side option.

      MAKE AHEAD AND STORAGE

      • Storage: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. The vegetables may soften a bit, but it still tastes good.
      • Freezing: You can freeze this for up to 2 months. Let it cool completely before transferring to a freezer-safe container. With freezing, it may change the texture.
      • Reheating: Reheat in a skillet over medium heat until warmed through. You can add a splash of water or broth if the sauce has thickened too much.

      TANYA'S TOP TIPS

      • Best beef cuts - Top sirloin, flank steak, or skirt steak work best. Slice against the grain about ¼-inch thick.
      • Don't overcrowd the pan - If your pan isn't big enough, cook the beef in batches. Overcrowding drops the temperature and the beef will steam instead of sear.
      • Prep everything first - Once you start cooking, things move fast. Have all your ingredients measured, chopped, and ready to go.
      Hand holding bowl of pepper steak with fork picking up the steak.

      RELATED RECIPES

      I hope you love this Jamaican pepper steak as much as we do. If you're looking for more Jamaican and Caribbean-inspired recipes, try these out:

      • Jamaican curry chicken - Another weeknight favorite with bold island flavors.
      • One-pot jerk chicken and rice - Everything cooks together for an easy cleanup.
      • Brown stew chicken - A classic Jamaican comfort food with rich gravy.
      • Rasta pasta - Creamy Caribbean pasta with jerk-seasoned chicken.

      If you make this Jamaican pepper steak recipe, please let us know how you like it by leaving a review below. Your feedback is appreciated!

      Jamaican pepper steak in a bowl with a spoon lifting up some of the pepper steak.
      Print Recipe
      5 from 1 vote

      Jamaican Pepper Steak Recipe

      This Jamaican pepper steak combines tender beef strips with colorful bell peppers and warm island spices for a quick, flavorful stir-fry.
      Prep Time15 minutes mins
      Cook Time20 minutes mins
      Total Time35 minutes mins
      Course: entree
      Cuisine: Caribbean
      Keyword: Jamaican pepper steak, pepper steak
      Servings: 6
      Calories: 215kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      For the Beef

      • 1 pound top sirloin or flank steak sliced into thin strips about ¼ inch thick
      • 2 teaspoons all-purpose seasoning
      • ½ teaspoon ground allspice
      • 2 tablespoons soy sauce
      • ½ tablespoon cornstarch

      For the Sauce

      • 1½ cups beef broth
      • 2 tablespoons dark soy sauce
      • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
      • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
      • 1 teaspoon onion powder
      • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
      • 1 tablespoon cornstarch

      For the Stir-Fry

      • 3-4 tablespoons olive oil divided
      • ½ red bell pepper sliced into strips about ¼ inch thick
      • ½ yellow bell pepper sliced into strips about ¼ inch thick
      • ½ green bell pepper sliced into strips about ¼ inch thick
      • 1 large yellow onion sliced into strips about ¼ inch thick
      • 3 cloves garlic thinly sliced
      • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger minced
      • 1 scotch bonnet or habanero pepper thinly sliced (remove seeds for less heat)
      • 2 sprigs fresh thyme or 1 teaspoon dried
      • 3 green onions sliced

      Instructions

      • In a bowl, season steak strips with all-purpose seasoning, allspice, soy sauce, and cornstarch. Mix well and let marinate for 30 minutes.
      • Make the sauce by whisking together beef broth, dark soy sauce, Worcestershire sauce, garlic powder, onion powder, ground black pepper, and cornstarch. Set aside.
      • Heat 2 tablespoons oil in a large skillet or wok over medium-high heat. Add beef in batches (don't overcrowd) and sear for 2-3 minutes until browned, flipping halfway. Remove and set aside.
      • In the same pan, add 2 tablespoons oil if needed. Add the yellow onion and peppers and cook for 3-4 minutes, stirring until the onion and peppers have softened. Add garlic, green onion, ginger, scotch bonnet, and thyme and stir for an additional minute.
      • Return the beef to the pan and add the sauce. Stir to combine. Reduce the heat to medium and simmer for 2-3 minutes until the sauce has thickened.
      • Remove from heat and serve hot.

      Video

      Notes

      • Slice beef about ¼ inch thick against the grain for maximum tenderness
      • Slice peppers and onions about ¼ inch thick for even cooking
      • This is best served fresh, but leftovers keep for 3 days in the refrigerator

      Nutrition

      Calories: 215kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 45mg | Sodium: 832mg | Potassium: 499mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 491IU | Vitamin C: 45mg | Calcium: 71mg | Iron: 3mg

      Cajun Broiled Shrimp (Quick and Easy)

      January 12, 2026 by Tanya Harris Leave a Comment

      broiled shrimp on plate with lemon and pardley in background

      This broiled shrimp is quick, flavorful, and ready in less than 30 minutes. With a simple Cajun marinade and a blast of high heat, you get tender shrimp with perfectly charred edges every time.

      broiled shrimp on plate with lemon and pardley in background

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      pic of Tanya

      I keep bags of frozen jumbo shrimp in my freezer because they're one of the easiest proteins to work with. I can defrost them, peel and devein, and have dinner on the table fast. The broiler does most of the work, giving you those nice charred spots without having to stand over a hot pan.

      This recipe uses garlic paste instead of minced garlic. The paste coats the shrimp evenly and saves prep time. You can buy it at the store or make your own by mashing fresh garlic with a pinch of salt. I like to serve this as an appetizer with cocktail sauce, or pair it with rice and vegetables for a complete meal. If you save your shrimp shells as I do, check out my Shrimp Stock recipe. Waste not, want not.

      Love, Tanya

      BROILED SHRIMP AT A GLANCE

      Prep Time: 15 minutes
      Cook Time: 6-8 minutes
      Total Time: 21-23 minutes
      Serves: 4
      Best For: Quick weeknight dinners, appetizers, meal prep

      A QUICK LOOK AT THE INGREDIENTS

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Jumbo shrimp - I buy whole jumbo frozen shrimp, defrost and peel them myself, leaving the tails on. This lets me save the shells for making shrimp stock later. You can also buy peeled shrimp to save time.
      • Garlic paste - This is the secret to getting garlic flavor on every piece of shrimp. The paste coats better than minced garlic. You can find it in tubes at most grocery stores, or make it by mashing fresh garlic with salt until smooth.
      • Cajun seasoning - Adds heat and complexity. Different brands vary in saltiness, so taste your marinade before adding the shrimp.
      • Olive oil - Helps the marinade stick to the shrimp and prevents them from drying out under the broiler.
      • Worcestershire sauce - Adds savory depth and a bit of umami.
      • Salt and black pepper - To taste. Go easy on the salt since Cajun seasoning already contains it.
      • Fresh lemon wedges - A squeeze of lemon juice at the end brightens everything up.
      • Finely chopped parsley - for a pop of color when serving to make it fancy. But honestly, it's optional.
      ingredients for the broiled shrimp

      HOW TO MAKE BROILED SHRIMP

      Step 1: Position the oven rack 4-6 inches from the heat source and then turn on the broiler. This distance gives you good charring without burning.

      Step 2: Make the garlic paste by mashing the garlic with a pinch of salt until it forms a smooth paste. If you're using store-bought garlic paste, skip this step.

      Step 3: In a bowl, combine the garlic paste, Cajun seasoning, olive oil, and Worcestershire sauce. Add salt and black pepper to taste. Since Cajun seasoning blends vary, taste the marinade and adjust the seasoning before adding the shrimp.

      Step 4: Add the shrimp to the bowl and toss until they're evenly coated with the marinade.

      seasoned shrimp in bowl

      Step 5: Arrange the shrimp in a single layer on a half sheet pan. Don't overlap them or they'll steam instead of char.

      raw seasoned shrimp on baking sheet

      Step 6: Broil for 6-8 minutes, flipping halfway through, until the shrimp are pink, opaque, and slightly charred at the edges. Watch them closely since broilers vary in intensity.

      broiled shrimp on sheet pan

      Step 7: Remove from the oven and squeeze fresh lemon juice over the top. Top with parsley if using it. Serve immediately.

      fork picking up broiled shrimp

      Having Fun with these Shrimp

      I'm giving you a base recipe, but make it your own by trying some of these versions:

      • Spicy version: Add a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes to the marinade.
      • Garlic butter: Brush the cooked shrimp with melted garlic butter as soon as they come out of the oven.
      • Herb addition: Toss in some fresh chopped parsley or cilantro for color and freshness.
      • Different seasonings: Swap the Cajun seasoning for Old Bay, jerk seasoning, or Italian herbs.

      SERVING SUGGESTIONS

      Serve this broiled shrimp as an appetizer with cocktail sauce or remoulade for dipping. It's great for parties.

      For a full meal, pair it with Jamaican Rice and Peas, Easy Yellow Rice, or Oven-Baked Rice. Add a side of Marinated Air Fryer Vegetables or a simple green salad.

      The shrimp also works great over pasta. Try it with Rasta Pasta or mixed into a cold pasta salad.

      close up of broiled shrimp on plate

      HOW TO BUY AND PREP SHRIMP

      I buy whole frozen jumbo shrimp and defrost them in cold water. Once thawed, I peel and devein them myself. This takes a few extra minutes, but it saves money and lets me keep the shells for making stock.

      When buying frozen shrimp, check the ingredient list. You want shrimp, with shrimp as the only ingredient listed. Some brands add sodium tripolyphosphate or other preservatives, which prevent the shrimp from charring properly under the broiler. Plain shrimp will give you those nice caramelized edges.

      This recipe uses very large or jumbo shrimp (16/20 to 21/25 count per pound), which is why the cook time is 6-8 minutes. If you're using smaller shrimp, such as medium (41/50 count) or large (31/40 count), reduce the cook time to 4-6 minutes and watch them closely. Just know that smaller shrimp won't char the same way larger ones do because they cook through faster.

      If you're short on time, buy already peeled and deveined shrimp. They work just as well in this recipe.

      MAKE AHEAD AND STORAGE

      Storage: Keep leftover broiled shrimp in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. The texture stays good, though they won't be quite as crispy as when fresh.

      Freezing: You can freeze cooked shrimp for up to 2 months. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight, then reheat.

      Reheating: Warm in a skillet over medium heat for 2-3 minutes, or microwave in 30-second intervals. Don't overcook or they'll get rubbery.

      TANYA'S TOP TIPS

      • Don't skip tasting the marinade before adding the shrimp. Cajun seasonings vary widely in salt content, and you don't want oversalted shrimp.
      • Make sure your shrimp are dry before tossing them in the marinade. Pat them with paper towels if needed. Wet shrimp won't brown properly.
      • Keep an eye on them while broiling. Broilers vary in intensity, and shrimp can go from perfectly done to overcooked in less than a minute.
      fork picking up broiled shrimp

      RELATED RECIPES

      I hope you love this broiled shrimp recipe as much as we do. If you're looking for more shrimp recipes or other broiled dishes, try these out:

      • Baked Jamaican Jerk Shrimp - Spicy, smoky, and full of island flavor. This recipe adds some peppers and pineapple. It's perfect for using in bowls or wrapping up with a tortilla.
      • Air Fryer Lemon Garlic Shrimp - Another quick cooking method with bright citrus notes. This is perfect for my friends who love cooking in the air fryer and want well-flavored shrimp.
      • Juicy Broiled Chicken Breast - If you love broiling, try this chicken recipe. It's perfect for using in salads.
      • Shrimp Cocktail - A classic appetizer that never goes out of style.
      • Easy Shrimp Salad - Perfect for lunch or light dinners, using poached shrimp.
      • New Orleans BBQ Shrimp - a quick stovetop dish with the most flavorful sauce.

      If you make this broiled shrimp recipe, please let us know how you like it by leaving a review below. Your feedback is appreciated!

      broiled shrimp on plate with lemon and pardley in background
      Print Recipe
      No ratings yet

      Broiled Shrimp Recipe

      This broiled shrimp is quick, flavorful, and ready in less than 30 minutes. With a simple Cajun marinade and perfectly charred edges, it's an easy weeknight dinner or appetizer.
      Prep Time15 minutes mins
      Cook Time6 minutes mins
      Total Time21 minutes mins
      Course: Appetizer
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: broiled shrimp, broiled shrimp recipe
      Servings: 4 people
      Calories: 152kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Equipment

      • Sheet Pan

      Ingredients

      • 1 lb jumbo shrimp peeled and deveined
      • 2 teaspoons garlic paste about to 2 garlic cloves
      • 2 teaspoons Cajun seasoning
      • 2 tablespoons olive oil
      • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
      • Salt and black pepper to taste
      • Fresh lemon wedges for serving
      • Chopped parsley for garnish optional

      Instructions

      • Position the rack 4-6 inches from the heat source and then turn on the broiler.
      • In a bowl, combine the garlic paste, Cajun seasoning, olive oil, and Worcestershire sauce. Add salt and black pepper to taste.
      • Add the shrimp to the bowl and toss until evenly coated with the marinade.
      • Arrange the shrimp in a single layer on a half sheet pan.
      • Broil for 6-8 minutes, flipping halfway, until the shrimp are pink, opaque, and slightly charred at the edges.
      • Remove from the oven and squeeze fresh lemon juice over the top. Top with parsley if using. Serve immediately.

      Notes

      • Cajun seasoning blends vary in salt content. Always taste the marinade before adding extra salt.
      • Pat shrimp dry before marinating for better browning.
      • Don't overlap shrimp on the pan or they'll steam instead of char.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 152kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 143mg | Sodium: 698mg | Potassium: 195mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 700IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 73mg | Iron: 1mg

      Black Bean Soup Recipe

      December 24, 2025 by Tanya Harris 4 Comments

      black bean soup in a bowl with toppings

      This black bean soup is hearty, smoky, and loaded with flavor. Made with tender black beans, smoky ham hock, and warm spices, it's the kind of cozy soup that hits the spot every time.

      black bean soup in a bowl with toppings

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      pic of Tanya

      If you're a regular reader here, you know I love a good cozy soup with lots of flavor. That's exactly what this black bean soup is. I'm a huge fan of black beans. They're filling, flavorful, and I use them all the time. You'll find them in my Slow Cooker Black Beans, my Black Bean Salsa, and now in this soup.

      This is one of those recipes I make when I want something comforting and easy. I usually make this in my pressure cooker for a quicker meal, but sometimes I let it simmer away on the stovetop until the beans get tender. The smoky ham hock gives it so much flavor, and that splash of vinegar at the end really brightens everything up.

      Love, Tanya

      Black Bean Soup At a Glance

      • Prep Time: 20 minutes
      • Cook Time: 45 minutes (pressure cooker) or 1 hour 30 minutes (stovetop)
      • Total Time: 1 hour (pressure cooker) or 1 hour 45 minutes (stovetop)
      • Serves: 6-8
      • Best For: Weeknight dinners, cozy lunches, meal prep

      A Quick Look at The Ingredients

      Ingredient amounts and full recipe instructions are on the printable recipe card at the bottom of the post.

      • Olive oil - used for sautéing the vegetables. Feel free to use any other high-heat cooking oil, like avocado oil, or even bacon fat.
      • Yellow onion, green bell pepper, garlic - diced onion and bell pepper, minced garlic form the aromatic base.
      • Ground cumin, dried oregano, salt, pepper, and bay leaves - to add seasoning to this dish.
      • Dried black beans - rinsed and picked over, no soaking needed
      • Smoked ham hock - this is what gives the soup its smoky, rich flavor. You can sub this with smoked turkey, bacon, or simply leave it out if you aren't a fan. You can add a little chipotle in adobo or smoked paprika if you want that smoky flavor with no meat.
      • Broth, water - chicken or vegetable broth both work great, combined with water to cook the beans.
      • White vinegar - added at the end to brighten the flavors
      • For serving - sour cream, chopped onion, cilantro, lime wedges.
      ingredients for black bean soup

      How to Make Black Bean Soup

      I've added instructions for the pressure cooker and the stovetop. This recipe is so adaptable.

      Step 1: Set your pressure cooker to sauté mode on high. Add the olive oil and heat until shimmering. Add the diced onion and bell pepper, and sauté for about 5 minutes until softened. Add the minced garlic, cumin, and oregano. Sauté for about 10 seconds, then turn off the sauté function.

      vegetables in pressure cooker being cooked

      Step 2: Add the black beans, ham hock, bay leaves, broth, and water to the pot. Stir to combine. Secure the lid and set to pressure cook on high for 45 minutes. When the time is up, allow the pressure to release naturally.

      ham hock and beans and liquid in pressure cooker

      Step 3. Carefully remove the ham hock and the bay leaves from the pot. Shred the meat from the bone, discarding the bone and any excess fat. Return the shredded meat to the pot. Discard the bay leaves. Using a wooden spoon, smash some of the beans against the side of the pot to create a thicker, creamier texture while keeping some beans whole.

      spoon holding up black beans

      Step 4. Stir in the white vinegar, then adjust the seasoning with salt and pepper to taste. Serve hot with sour cream, chopped onion, cilantro, and lime wedges.

      black bean soup in bowl with spoon

      Stovetop Method

      Follow step 1 above, using a large pot or Dutch oven over medium-high heat instead of a pressure cooker. Add the black beans, ham hock, bay leaves, broth, and water. Bring to a boil, then reduce the heat to low. Cover and simmer for 1 hour and 30 minutes, or until beans are tender.

      Stir occasionally and add more water if needed. Remove the ham hock, shred the meat, and return it to the pot. Smash some of the beans against the side of the pot for texture. Stir in the white vinegar, then adjust the seasoning with salt and pepper to taste. Serve hot with toppings.

      Variations

      • Make it vegetarian by omitting the ham hock and using vegetable broth. Add a teaspoon of smoked paprika for that smoky depth you'll be missing.
      • Use different toppings, such as shredded cheese, avocado, or crushed tortilla chips.
      • Add a can of diced tomatoes or some chopped carrots and celery to the soup for extra vegetables.
      • For a thicker soup, mash more of the beans. For a thinner soup, add more broth or water.

      Serving Suggestions

      • Serve this black bean soup with warm cornbread or add a side of rice to make it even more filling.
      • Top with fresh jalapeños if you like some heat.
      black bean soup in bowl with linen on side

      Should I Soak the Beans?

      I usually skip soaking the beans, and they turn out perfectly tender using either cooking method. However, if you want to soak them, go right ahead. Soaking means your beans will cook a bit faster. If you do soak them, reduce the pressure cooking time to about 30 minutes or the stovetop time to about 1 hour.

      If your beans are older, they may need a little extra time; just keep simmering until they’re tender.

      Make Ahead and Storage

      Store leftover black bean soup in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. The soup will thicken as it sits, so you may need to add a bit of broth or water when reheating. The soup can be frozen for up to 3 months.

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • No need to soak the beans for either cooking method; they'll cook perfectly as is.
      • The vinegar at the end brightens the flavors, so don't skip it. You could also use lime juice or lemon. It brightens the dish.
      • When shredding the ham hock meat, watch out for small bones and remove any excess fat.
      • Hold back on extra salt until after cooking, since the ham hock and broth can be salty.

      I hope you love this black bean soup recipe as much as we do. If you're looking for more hearty soup recipes, try these out:

      • Split Pea Soup with Ham - Another flavorful soup, but made with the ham bone.
      • Sausage Lentil Soup - Hearty and full of flavor, sausage and lentils are such a good combo.
      • 15 Bean Soup - If you love bean soups, this one's a must-try. I use Italian sausage to season this 15-bean soup.
      • Vegetable Beef Soup - Hearty and delicious, perfect for cold days.
      black bean soup in a bowl with toppings
      Print Recipe
      5 from 1 vote

      Black Bean Soup Recipe

      This hearty black bean soup is rich, flavorful, and made with smoky ham hock for depth. The pressure cooker makes it quick and easy, while the stovetop method is just as delicious with a bit more patience. Serve with sour cream, fresh cilantro, chopped onion, and lime wedges for a complete meal.
      Prep Time20 minutes mins
      Cook Time45 minutes mins
      Total Time1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
      Course: Soup
      Cuisine: American, Caribbean
      Keyword: black bean soup
      Servings: 6 people
      Calories: 416kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 2 Tablespoons olive oil
      • 1 large yellow onion diced
      • 1 large green bell pepper diced
      • 4-6 cloves garlic minced
      • 2 teaspoons ground cumin
      • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
      • 1 lb dried black beans rinsed and picked over
      • 1 smoked ham hock about 7.9 ounce
      • 4 cups chicken broth or vegetable
      • 2 cups water
      • 2 bay leaves
      • Salt and pepper to taste
      • 2 Tablespoons white vinegar

      Instructions

      Pressure Cooker Method

      • Set pressure cooker to sauté mode. Add olive oil, onion, and bell pepper. Sauté 5 minutes until softened. Add garlic, cumin, and oregano. Sauté 10 seconds, then turn off sauté function.
      • Add black beans, ham hock, bay leaves, broth, and water. Secure lid and pressure cook on high for 45 minutes. Allow natural pressure release.
      • Remove the bay leaves and discard.. Remove ham hock, shred meat, and return to pot. Smash some beans against the side of the pot for thicker texture.
      • Stir in vinegar and season with salt and pepper. Serve hot with desired toppings.

      Stovetop Method

      • Heat olive oil in large pot over medium-high heat. Add onion and bell pepper. Sauté 5 minutes until softened. Add garlic, cumin, and oregano. Sauté 10 seconds.
      • Add black beans, ham hock, bay leaves, broth, and water. Bring to a boil, then reduce to low. Cover and simmer 1 hour 30 minutes until beans are tender. Stir occasionally and add water if needed.
      • Remove the bay leaves and discard. Remove ham hock, shred meat, and return to pot. Smash some beans for texture. Stir in vinegar and season with salt and pepper. Serve hot with desired toppings.

      Video

      Notes

      • For a vegetarian version, omit the ham hock and use vegetable broth. Add a teaspoon of smoked paprika for depth.
      • Soup keeps well in the refrigerator for up to 5 days and freezes beautifully for up to 3 months.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 416kcal | Carbohydrates: 51g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 1050mg | Potassium: 1305mg | Fiber: 12g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 33IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 128mg | Iron: 5mg

      Jamaican Sorrel Drink

      December 17, 2025 by Tanya Harris 5 Comments

      2 glasses of sorrel on a cutting board

      This Jamaican sorrel drink is a Holiday staple. It's made from dried sorrel steeped with warming spices until it turns a gorgeous ruby color. The flavor is tart and slightly sweet, and I love serving it ice-cold.

      2 glasses of sorrel on a cutting board

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      Every Christmas morning deserves a tall glass of cold, refreshing sorrel punch. I know, it seems backward to drink a tall glass of cold anything during the winter, but this sorrel punch is a traditional drink I grew up drinking. It’s pretty much a must in any Caribbean household.

      pic of Tanya

      Sorrel generally involves overnight steeping of fresh or dried sorrel to release the flavors. It's pretty quick to get everything together; you just need patience in getting the herbs to steep long enough to release maximum flavor.

      Initially, I made this in a pressure cooker to speed up the process, but the traditional stovetop method is best. You just gotta give it a day or 2 to get the best flavor possible. But the wait is so well worth it.

      For more drink recipes, check out my Homemade Cranberry Lemonade and Slow Cooker Hot Holiday Punch.

      ♡, Tanya

      A Quick Look at the Ingredients

      • Sorrel - These are the dried sepals of the hibiscus flower, deep red in color. I use dried sorrel, which you can find at Caribbean markets or online.
      • Ginger - Freshly grated ginger is best. It makes a real difference in the flavor, so don't skip this step.
      • Whole Spices - I use pimento seeds (allspice berries), whole cloves, and a cinnamon stick. These warm spices give the drink its signature holiday flavor. Feel free to use more or less of these, but I strongly suggest using whole spices rather than ground. Ground spices may make your drink muddy.
      • Water - The base for steeping everything together.
      ingredients for sorrel on table

      How to make this sorrel drink

      Step 1: Wash the sorrel and ginger and drain the water. Add the sorrel, ginger, pimento seeds, cloves, and cinnamon stick to a large pot with the water and bring to a boil.

      ingredients for sorrel in water on stovetop being boiled

      Step 2: Remove from heat immediately and cover the pot. Let the mixture steep for at least 8 hours, or preferably overnight in the refrigerator.

      Step 3: Strain the mixture and discard the solids. Sweeten with sugar to taste, stirring until fully dissolved.

      sorrel being strained

      Step 4: Serve chilled over ice. Store in the refrigerator for up to 2 weeks. The flavor improves after a day or two.

      glass of sorrel with ice

      What is sorrel?

      Caribbean sorrel is also known as the Roselle plant (Hibiscus sabdariffa), which is a species of the hibiscus flower. This sorrel is not the same as the leafy green plant known as sorrel. This sorrel is bright red in color and gives dishes an amazing, deep, rich red color, perfect for Christmas!

      It adds a tart and tangy flavor, similar to cranberries or pomegranate. Another popular name for this beautiful flower is "flor de jamaica."

      A hand holding sorrel

      You can find dried sorrel leaves in Caribbean markets or online.

      There are also many well-known health benefits of sorrel, a.k.a. hibiscus. To be honest, I like to prepare and drink this year-round, not just for Christmas.

      How do you serve it?

      This punch is best served ice cold, so once you have made it, keep it in the fridge until you are ready to serve. Fill glasses with ice, pour the drink over it, and garnish with a fresh orange slice.

      Two glasses of sorrel drink garnished with orange slices

      Tanya's Top Tips

      • Use freshly grated ginger rather than pre-grated for the best flavor. Don't skip on grating the ginger, it makes a difference in the flavor.
      • If you prefer some alcohol in your holiday drinks, you can easily spike this sorrel drink. Add white rum or vodka to the pitcher or to the individual glasses before serving.
      • For a fizzy drink, I add a splash of Ginger ale to the top when serving.

      More Holiday Drink Recipes

      • Jamaican Style Carrot Juice Recipe
      • Jamaican Ginger Beer
      • Jamaican Rum Punch Recipe
      • Green Sherbet Punch
      • Hot Cocoa
      2 glasses of sorrel on a cutting board
      Print Recipe
      4.80 from 5 votes

      Jamaican Sorrel Drink Recipe

      This Jamaican sorrel drink is a herb infused beverage served over ice. Traditionally served during the holidays it's refreshing, easy to make and full of flavor.
      Prep Time10 minutes mins
      Steep Time8 hours hrs
      Total Time8 hours hrs 10 minutes mins
      Course: Drinks
      Cuisine: Jamaican
      Keyword: how to make sorrel drink, sorrel and ginger, sorrel drink
      Servings: 6 drinks
      Calories: 27kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Equipment

      • Dried Sorrel

      Ingredients

      • 4 Oz dried sorrel about 3 cups
      • 3 Oz ginger grated
      • 1 Tablespoon pimento seeds allspice berries
      • 1 teaspoon whole cloves
      • 1 stick cinnamon
      • 10 cups water
      • sugar to taste

      Instructions

      • Wash the sorrel and ginger and drain the water. Add the sorrel, ginger, pimento seeds, cloves, and cinnamon stick to a large pot with the water and bring to a boil.
      • Remove from heat immediately and cover the pot. Let the mixture steep for at least 8 hours, or preferably overnight in the refrigerator.
      • Strain the mixture and discard the solids. Sweeten with sugar to taste, stirring until fully dissolved.
      • Serve chilled over ice. Store in the refrigerator for up to 2 weeks. The flavor improves after a day or two.

      Video

      Notes

      • Use freshly grated ginger rather than pre-grated for the best flavor.
      • Sweeten with brown sugar or dilute with additional water to suit your tastes.
      • I usually add about 1 cup of sugar. 

      Nutrition

      Calories: 27kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Sodium: 23mg | Potassium: 75mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 456IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

      This post was originally published September 14, 2020. It has been updated with new photos and information.

      Easy Creamy Broccoli Cheddar Soup Recipe

      December 15, 2025 by Tanya Harris 7 Comments

      spoon picking up soup from bowl

      This homemade broccoli cheddar soup is thick, creamy, and ready in about 45 minutes. A touch of nutmeg and thyme round out the flavors, and it tastes just like the restaurant version I've been ordering for years.

      broccoli cheddar soup 1

      You’ll find the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Be sure to check out the blog post itself for extra tips and tricks!

      I've been on a mission lately to up my culinary skills, and one of the things I'm most proud of is learning to make my own soups from scratch. I love a roux soup to keep me cozy, especially during the colder months. There's something about mastering that butter and flour base that makes you feel like a real cook.

      pic of Tanya

      Broccoli and cheddar soup is something I’ve always ordered at restaurants, and I was so glad when I finally decided to make it at home. After making my Cream of Mushroom Soup and loving the roux technique, I knew I had to tackle broccoli cheddar next. Creamy soups might be my favorite.

      I also make my own Homemade Chicken Broth now, which is perfect for recipes like this.

      The best part about this recipe is how it comes together in under an hour and tastes better than anything you’d get at a chain restaurant.

      ♡, Tanya

      Broccoli Cheddar Soup At a Glance

      • Prep Time: 15 minutes
      • Cook Time: 30 minutes
      • Total Time: 45 minutes
      • Serves: 6
      • Best For: Weeknight dinners, cozy lunches, meal prep

      A Quick Look at The Ingredients You'll Need

      • Butter and all-purpose flour - The foundation of your roux. Use unsalted butter so you can control the salt level. All-purpose flour works with the butter to create the roux that thickens your soup.
      • Onion, celery, carrot - This aromatic trio adds depth and a subtle sweetness to the soup base.
      • Garlic - Use 2 to 4 cloves, depending on how much you love garlic. Or more, it's your soup, and I honestly think there are no rules when it comes to how much garlic to add.
      • Broccoli - Fresh or frozen works here. I chop the stems separately from the florets since the stems need more cooking time. If you're looking for more ways to use broccoli, try my Air Fryer Broccoli or Oven Baked Broccoli.
      • Chicken or vegetable broth - The liquid base of your soup. Use homemade or store-bought.
      • Heavy cream - This is what makes the soup rich and creamy.
      • Sharp cheddar cheese - Grate it fresh from a block for the best melting quality and flavor.
      • Dried thyme, ground nutmeg, salt, and pepper - For seasoning the soup.
      ingredients for broccoli cheddar soup on table

      How to Make Broccoli Cheddar Soup

      Step 1: Melt the butter in a large pot or Dutch oven over medium-low heat. Add the onion, celery, carrot, garlic, and a pinch of salt. Cook gently, stirring occasionally, until the vegetables are soft and translucent, about 6 to 8 minutes. You want them soft, not browned.

      vegetables cooking in butter in pot

      Step 2: Add the chopped broccoli stems and cook for 3 to 4 minutes, stirring occasionally, until the stems begin to soften.

      Step 3: Sprinkle the flour evenly over the vegetables. Stir well to coat everything, then cook for 2 to 3 minutes, stirring constantly, to cook out the raw flour taste. This is your roux.

      Step 4: Gradually whisk in the broth, stirring constantly to prevent lumps from forming. Bring the mixture to a simmer.

      Step 5: Add the broccoli florets and thyme to the pot. Bring to a simmer and simmer gently, uncovered, until all vegetables are completely tender, about 8 to 10 minutes. If using frozen broccoli, this may take slightly less time.

      broccoli and vegetables covered in broth in pot

      Step 6: Remove the pot from the heat and carefully puree the soup to your desired consistency. For a perfectly smooth soup, puree all of it; for a chunkier soup, puree only half and leave the rest with texture.

      pureed broccoli cheddar soup in pot

      Step 7: Return the soup to the pot if you used a blender, and stir in the heavy cream. Add the grated cheddar cheese in small handfuls, stirring after each addition until all the cheese is melted and the soup is smooth and creamy.

      Step 8: Taste and adjust seasoning with salt and pepper. Add the nutmeg.

      broccoli cheddar soup being picked up with spoon

      Variations

      • Make it chunky: If you prefer a chunkier soup with visible broccoli pieces, only puree half of the soup and leave the rest with texture.
      • Add protein: Stir in shredded rotisserie chicken or crispy bacon bits for a heartier meal.
      • Use different cheese: Try a combination of sharp cheddar and gruyere for a more complex flavor, or add a bit of parmesan for extra depth.
      • Spice it up: Add a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes for a slight kick.
      • Make it vegetarian: Use vegetable broth instead of chicken broth.

      Serving Suggestions

      This soup is a meal on its own, but it goes great with crusty bread for dipping. A simple side salad makes a nice contrast to the richness of the soup. You can also serve it in bread bowls for an extra special presentation. That may be next on my list of culinary skills to attempt.

      For a complete comfort food meal, pair it with Air Fryer Biscuits, mayonnaise biscuits, or a grilled cheese sandwich.

      Can I Make This Soup Ahead or Freeze It?

      This soup tastes even better the next day. Store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat gently on the stovetop, adding a splash of broth or cream if it's too thick.

      You can freeze this soup for up to 2 months. When ready to serve, reheat it slowly on the stovetop from frozen, whisking frequently as it thaws and warms. This helps keep the texture smooth and prevents the dairy from separating.

      Troubleshooting: Why Did My Soup Turn Out Grainy?

      If your soup turned out grainy, it's usually because the cheese was added when the soup was too hot, causing the proteins to seize up. Always remove the soup from direct heat before adding the cheese, and add it gradually while stirring. Using freshly grated cheese from a block rather than pre-shredded cheese also helps, since pre-shredded cheese contains anti-caking agents that can affect texture.

      Tanya's Top Tips for the Best Broccoli Cheddar Soup

      • Don't rush the roux: Take your time cooking the flour with the vegetables for a few minutes. This cooks out the raw flour taste and ensures your soup won't have a pasty flavor.
      • Use block cheese: Pre-shredded cheese contains anti-caking agents that can make your soup grainy. Grate your own cheese from a block for the smoothest, creamiest results.
      • Control the thickness: If your soup is too thick, thin it out with a bit more broth or cream. If it's too thin, let it simmer a bit longer or make a small additional roux with a tablespoon each of butter and flour, then whisk it into the soup.
      • Season as you go: Add salt at the beginning when cooking the vegetables to help them release moisture and soften properly. Taste and adjust the seasoning again at the end.
      • Save some florets: If you like texture in your soup, reserve a handful of small florets to stir in after blending for some nice bites of broccoli.
      spoon picking up soup from bowl

      If you make this Broccoli Cheddar Soup, I'd love to hear how it turned out! Leave a comment below and let me know what you think.

      spoon picking up soup from bowl
      Print Recipe
      5 from 2 votes

      Creamy Broccoli Cheddar Soup

      A creamy, comforting broccoli cheddar soup made with a classic roux base. This recipe features the beloved combination of sharp cheddar and tender broccoli, elevated with warm nutmeg and freshly ground black pepper for aromatic depth.
      Prep Time15 minutes mins
      Cook Time30 minutes mins
      Total Time45 minutes mins
      Course: Soup
      Cuisine: American
      Keyword: broccoli cheddar soup
      Servings: 6 people
      Calories: 274kcal
      Author: Tanya Harris

      Ingredients

      • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
      • 1 medium onion chopped
      • 1 stalk celery chopped
      • 1 medium carrot chopped
      • 2 to 4 garlic cloves chopped
      • 4 cups broccoli fresh or frozen (stems chopped, florets cut into bite-sized pieces, and stems separated from florets)
      • 4 tablespoons all-purpose flour
      • 4 cups chicken or vegetable broth
      • ½ cup heavy cream
      • 1 cup sharp cheddar cheese grated (plus extra for garnish)
      • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
      • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
      • Salt and pepper to taste

      Instructions

      • Melt the butter in a large pot or Dutch oven over medium-low heat. Add the onion, celery, carrot, and garlic. Add a pinch of salt. Cook gently, stirring occasionally, until the vegetables are soft and translucent, about 6 to 8 minutes. The goal is to soften without browning.
      • Add the chopped broccoli stems and cook for 3 to 4 minutes, stirring occasionally, until the stems begin to soften.
      • Sprinkle the flour evenly over the vegetables. Stir well to coat everything, then cook for 2 to 3 minutes, stirring constantly, to cook out the raw flour taste.
      • Gradually whisk in the broth, stirring constantly to prevent lumps from forming. Bring the mixture to a simmer.
      • Add the broccoli florets and thyme to the pot. Bring to a simmer and simmer gently, uncovered, until all vegetables are completely tender, about 8 to 10 minutes. If using frozen broccoli, this may take slightly less time.
      • Remove the pot from the heat and carefully puree the soup in batches in a blender until silky smooth, allowing steam to escape from the lid. Or use an immersion blender. You can also puree the soup to your desired consistency.
      • Return the soup to the pot (if using a blender) and stir in the heavy cream. Add the grated cheddar cheese in small handfuls, stirring after each addition until all the cheese is melted and the soup is smooth and creamy.
      • Stir in the nutmeg and season with salt and pepper to taste.
      • Ladle the hot soup into bowls. Garnish with extra shredded cheddar cheese or a sprinkle of fresh thyme leaves if desired.

      Notes

      • Store leftover soup in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat gently on the stovetop, adding a splash of broth or cream if needed to thin the soup.
      • Always remove the soup from the heat before adding the cheese and add it gradually while stirring to prevent the cheese from becoming grainy. Use freshly grated cheese from a block for the best results.

      Nutrition

      Calories: 274kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 64mg | Sodium: 748mg | Potassium: 337mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 2817IU | Vitamin C: 55mg | Calcium: 198mg | Iron: 1mg
      • 1
      • 2
      • 3
      • …
      • 19
      • Next Page »
      tanya holding bowl and mixing

      Welcome!

      Welcome to My Forking Life! Hi, I'm Tanya, an attorney, busy wife and mom, and lover of quick, easy, and delicious meals.

      More about me

      Popular Recipes

      • Jamaican Oxtails Recipe
      • Air fryer fried chicken on a white platter
        Air Fryer Fried Chicken
      • brown stew chicken in pan
        Brown Stew Chicken
      • Jamaican Instant Pot Rice and Beans

      Holiday Favorites

      • sweet potato pie on a plate
        Southern Sweet Potato Pie Recipe
      • spoon lifting gravy out of gravy dish
        Easy Recipe for Gravy without Drippings
      • Stirring the giblet gravy with a spoon.
        Grandma's Giblet Gravy Recipe
      • creamy baked macaroni and cheese, the best baked macaroni and cheese, creamy mac and cheese
        Creamy Baked Macaroni and Cheese
      as seen on...various online websites text listed

      Footer

      ↑ back to top
      • Privacy Policy
      • Contact
      • About Tanya

      As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases.

      Copyright © 2026 My Forking Life

      Rate This Recipe

      Your vote:




      Let us know what you thought of this recipe:

      This worked exactly as written, thanks!
      My family loved this!
      Thank you for sharing this recipe

      Or write in your own words:

      A rating is required
      A name is required
      An email is required